Upload
ziya-2009
View
313
Download
8
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 1/283
Chapter 1 Overview 1-1.........................................................................................
1.1 Data Configuration Principle 1-1...................................................................
1.2 Authority 1-3.................................................................................................
1.3 Operation Step 1-4.......................................................................................1.4 Start the BSC Data Auto Configuration System 1-4.....................................
1.5 Initial Data Configuration 1-9........................................................................
1.5.1 Start initial data configuration 1-9.........................................................
1.5.2 Introduction to the Main Interfaces 1-10.................................................
1.5.3 Data Backup and Reloading 1-13..........................................................
1.5.4 Modification of System Parameters 1-17...............................................
1.5.5 Data Transfer and Conversion 1-19.......................................................
1.5.6 Export Network Parameter 1-20.............................................................
1.5.7 Import Network Parameter 1-20.............................................................1.5.8 Report Cell Information to Server 1-21..................................................
1.5.9 Operation Introduction 1-21...................................................................
1.6 Dynamic Data Configuration 1-24..................................................................
1.6.1 Start Dynamic Data Configuration 1-25.................................................
1.6.2 Main Interface Introduction 1-25............................................................
1.6.3 Data Backup 1-27..................................................................................
1.6.4 Report Cell Information to Server 1-27..................................................
1.6.5 Refresh Selected Tables 1-28................................................................
1.6.6 Dynamic Configuration Procedure 1-28.................................................
1.7 Data Browsing 1-29........................................................................................
1.8 Troubleshooting 1-31......................................................................................
1.8.1 Troubleshooting with Starting 1-31........................................................
1.8.2 Troubleshooting about Dynamic Configuration 1-35..............................
Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data 2-1.......................................................................
2.1 Modify BIE Visibility 2-1................................................................................
2.2 Modify LAPD Board’s Visibility 2-4...............................................................
2.3 Modify BSC Interface Phase ID 2-6..............................................................
2.4 Modify Voice Optimization Parameter 2-8....................................................
2.5 Modify BSC BIE CRC4 Check 2-9................................................................
2.6 Configure Monitor Timeslot 2-11....................................................................
2.7 Modify Abis Bypass Switch 2-16....................................................................
2.8 Dynamic Configuration without Commands 2-18...........................................
2.8.1 Trunk Circuits 2-19.................................................................................
2.8.2 BTS Software Index 2-22.......................................................................
2.8.3 Flow Control 2-25...................................................................................
2.8.4 Common Parameter 2-26.......................................................................
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 2/283
2.8.5 Semi-Permanent Connection 2-28.........................................................
2.8.6 Alarm Parameter 2-30............................................................................
2.8.7 GMEM Configuration 2-32.....................................................................
2.8.8 Board Software Loading 2-35................................................................
2.8.9 Timer Data 2-36.....................................................................................
2.8.10 TMU Auto Activation Info 2-38.............................................................
2.9 Import Network Parameters 2-42...................................................................
2.10 Export Network Parameters 2-43.................................................................
2.11 Modify Reserved Parameters 2-45...............................................................
Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data 3-1.......................................................................
3.1 Add a Site 3-1...............................................................................................
3.2 Delete a Site 3-15...........................................................................................
3.3 Add TRX 3-20.................................................................................................3.4 Delete TRX 3-26.............................................................................................
3.5 Add or Delete Board 3-29...............................................................................
3.6 Modify Board Type 3-32.................................................................................
3.7 Modify Site Data 3-36.....................................................................................
3.8 Modify Site’s Output Property 3-39.................................................................
3.9 Startup Traffic Stat. Task Re-register 3-40.....................................................
3.10 Rename Site or Cell 3-42.............................................................................
3.11 Modify Ring Topology Mark 3-44..................................................................
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data 4-1........................................................................
4.1 Add Cell 4-1..................................................................................................
4.2 Delete Cell 4-7..............................................................................................
4.3 Modify BCC and NCC 4-10............................................................................
4.4 Modify Cell’s Property 4-13............................................................................
4.5 Modify Cell’s Call Control Parameter 4-16.....................................................
4.6 Modify Cell’s Alarm Limit 4-18........................................................................
4.7 Modify Cell’s FH Property 4-20.......................................................................
4.8 Modify Cell’s Handover Parameter 4-25.........................................................
4.9 Modify Cell’s Power Control Parameter 4-30.................................................
4.10 Modify Cell’s Channel Management Parameter 4-32...................................
4.11 Modify Cell’s CGI 4-35..................................................................................
4.12 Modify Cell’s System Information 4-37.........................................................
4.13 Modify Cell’s Broadcast DRX Property 4-41.................................................
4.14 Modify Cell’s Install Status 4-43...................................................................
4.15 Modify Cell’s Allocation Table (BA1 & BA2 Table) 4-45...............................
4.16 Modify Double Timeslots Related Property 4-48..........................................
4.17 Modify TRX’s Property 4-51.........................................................................
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 3/283
4.18 Modify DC Bias Voltage and RACH Min Access Level 4-54........................
4.19 Modify TRX’s Channel Type 4-56.................................................................
4.20 Modify TRX’s Frequency 4-60......................................................................
4.21 Modify GPRS Function 4-63.........................................................................
4.22 Modify TRX Priority 4-65..............................................................................
4.23 External Cell 4-67.........................................................................................
4.23.1 Add External Cell 4-67.........................................................................
4.23.2 Delete External Cell 4-70.....................................................................
4.23.3 Modify External Cell 4-71.....................................................................
4.24 Batch Modify Cell’s Network Parameter 4-74...............................................
4.25 Configure RSL Flow Control Parameter 4-77...............................................
Appendix A Abbreviations A-1..............................................................................
Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge B-1...........................................................
B.1 BSC Data B-1...............................................................................................
B.1.1 Configuration Principles and Flow B-1.................................................
B.1.2 Numbering Principle B-2......................................................................
B.1.3 AM/ CM Data Configuration B-5...........................................................
B.1.4 BM Data Configuration B-7..................................................................
B.2 Clock Data Configuration B-11.......................................................................
B.3 Trunk and Signaling on the A- interface B-12.................................................
B.4 BTS Networking B-14.....................................................................................B.4.1 Principle of Numbering B-14..................................................................
B.4.2 Introduction to BIE B-16.........................................................................
B.4.3 Star Networking B-18.............................................................................
B.4.4 Chain Networking B-22..........................................................................
B.4.5 Tree Networking B-39............................................................................
B.4.6 Half Rate Networking B-40.....................................................................
B.4.7 Ring Networking B-43............................................................................
Appendix C Correspondence Relation between Data Table and DBFFiles C-1...................................................................................................................
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 4/283
HUAWEI
M900/M1800 Base Station Controller
Data Configuration Manual Dynamic Configuration
V300R002
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 5/283
M900/M1800 Base Station Controller
Data Configuration Manual
Volume Dynamic Configuration
Manual Version T2-031674-20031110-C-6.01
Product Version V300R002
BOM 31160974
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support
and service. Please feel free to contact our local office, customer care center or company
headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,
Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China
Postal Code: 518129
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: [email protected]
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 6/283
© 2003 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks
®, HUAWEI
®, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC, SBS,
TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, , M900/M1800,
TELESIGHT, Quidview, NETENGINE, Musa, OptiX, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia,
VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN, C&C08 iNET, iBill and infox are trademarks of Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort
has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the
contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document
don't constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 7/283
About This Manual
Version
The product version that corresponds to the manual is M900/M1800 Base Station
Controller V300R002.
Organization of the Manual
The product version corresponds to the manual is M900/M1800 BSC V300R002.
Chapter 1 is a brief introduction of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System. Including
the principle of data configuration, the relationship between different data format, and
common troubleshooting. The chapter is same as the Chapter 1 in M900/M1800 Base
Station Controller Data Configuration Manual – Initial Configuration.
Chapter 2 introduces in detail the dynamic configuration of BSC.
Chapter 3 introduces in detail the dynamic configuration of BTS.
Chapter 4 introduces in detail the dynamic configuration of Cell.
Appendix is about the abbreviation and fundamental knowledge about data
configuration. The chapter is same as the Appendix in M900/M1800 Base Station
Controller Data Configuration Manual – Initial Configuration.
Target Readers
The manual is intended for the following readers:
z Marketing staff
z Installation engineers & technicians
z Operation & maintenance personnel
Conventions
This document uses the following conventions:
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 8/283
I. General conventions
Convention Description
Arial Normal paragraphs are in Arial.
Arial Narrow Warnings, cautions, notes and tips are in Arial Narrow.
Bold Headings, Command, Command Description are in boldface.
Terminal Display Terminal Display is in Courier New; message input by the user via the terminal is inboldface.
II. Command conventions
Convention Description
italic font Command arguments for which you supply values are in italics.
[ ] Elements in square brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... } Alternative keywords are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One isselected.
[ x | y | ... ] Optional alternative keywords are grouped in square brackets and separated byvertical bars. One (or none) is selected.
{ x | y | ... } * Alternative keywords are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. Aminimum of one and maximum of all can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ] * Optional alternative keywords are grouped in square brackets and separated byvertical bars. Many (or none) are selected.
! A line starting with an exclamation mark is comments.
III. GUI conventions
Convention Description
< > Message entered via the terminal is within angle brackets.
[ ] MMIs, menu items, data table and field names are inside square brackets [ ].
/
Multi-level menus are separated by forward slashes (/). For example,
[File/Create/Folder].
IV. Keyboard operation
Format Description
<Key>Press the key with key name expressed with a pointed bracket, e.g. <Enter>,<Tab>, <Backspace>, or<A>.
<Key1+Key2>Press the keys concurrently; e.g. <Ctrl+Alt+A> means the three keys should bepressed concurrently.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 9/283
Format Description
<Key1, Key2> Press the keys in turn, e.g. <Alt, A>means the two keys should be pressed in turn.
[Menu Option]The item with a square bracket indicates the menu option, e.g. [System] option onthe main menu. The item with a pointed bracket indicates the functional buttonoption, e.g. <OK> button on some interface.
[Menu1/Menu2/Menu3]Multi-level menu options, e.g. [System/Option/Color setup] on the main menuindicates [Color Setup] on the menu option of [Option], which is on the menu optionof [System].
V. Mouse operation
Action Description
Click Press the left button or right button quickly (left button by default).
Double Click Press the left button twice continuously and quickly.
Drag Press and hold the left button and drag it to a certain position.
VI. Symbols
Eye-catching symbols are also used in this document to highlight the points worthy of
special attention during the operation. They are defined as follows:
Caution, Warning, Danger : Means reader be extremely careful during the
operation.
Note, Comment, Tip, Knowhow, Thought: Means a complementary description.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 10/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Table of Contents
i
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Overview....................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 Data Configuration Principle.............................................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Authority............................................................................................................................. 1-3 1.3 Operation Step................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.4 Start the BSC Data Auto Configuration System ................................................................ 1-4 1.5 Initial Data Configuration ................................................................................................... 1-9
1.5.1 Start initial data configuration.................................................................................. 1-9 1.5.2 Introduction to the Main Interfaces........................................................................ 1-10 1.5.3 Data Backup and Reloading ................................................................................. 1-13 1.5.4 Modification of System Parameters ...................................................................... 1-17 1.5.5 Data Transfer and Conversion.............................................................................. 1-19 1.5.6 Export Network Parameter.................................................................................... 1-20 1.5.7 Import Network Parameter.................................................................................... 1-20 1.5.8 Report Cell Information to Server.......................................................................... 1-21 1.5.9 Operation Introduction........................................................................................... 1-21
1.6 Dynamic Data Configuration............................................................................................ 1-24 1.6.1 Start Dynamic Data Configuration......................................................................... 1-25 1.6.2 Main Interface Introduction.................................................................................... 1-25 1.6.3 Data Backup.......................................................................................................... 1-27 1.6.4 Report Cell Information to Server.......................................................................... 1-27 1.6.5 Refresh Selected Tables....................................................................................... 1-28 1.6.6 Dynamic Configuration Procedure ........................................................................ 1-28
1.7 Data Browsing.................................................................................................................. 1-29 1.8 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................... 1-31
1.8.1 Troubleshooting with Starting................................................................................ 1-31 1.8.2 Troubleshooting about Dynamic Configuration..................................................... 1-35
Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data .................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1 Modify BIE Visibility ........................................................................................................... 2-1 2.2 Modify LAPD Board's Visibility........................................................................................... 2-4 2.3 Modify BSC Interface Phase ID......................................................................................... 2-6 2.4 Modify Voice Optimization Parameter ............................................................................... 2-8 2.5 Modify BSC BIE CRC4 Check........................................................................................... 2-9 2.6 Configure Monitor Timeslot.............................................................................................. 2-11 2.7 Modify Abis Bypass Switch.............................................................................................. 2-16 2.8 Dynamic Configuration without Commands .................................................................... 2-18
2.8.1 Trunk Circuits ........................................................................................................ 2-19 2.8.2 BTS Software Index .............................................................................................. 2-22
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 11/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Table of Contents
ii
2.8.3 Flow Control .......................................................................................................... 2-25 2.8.4 Common Parameter.............................................................................................. 2-26 2.8.5 Semi-Permanent Connection................................................................................ 2-28 2.8.6 Alarm Parameter ................................................................................................... 2-30
2.8.7 GMEM Configuration............................................................................................. 2-32 2.8.8 Board Software Loading........................................................................................ 2-35 2.8.9 Timer Data............................................................................................................. 2-36 2.8.10 TMU Auto Activation Info .................................................................................... 2-38
2.9 Import Network Parameters............................................................................................. 2-42 2.10 Export Network Parameters........................................................................................... 2-43 2.11 Modify Reserved Parameters ........................................................................................ 2-45
Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data..................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1 Add a Site .......................................................................................................................... 3-1 3.2 Delete a Site .................................................................................................................... 3-15 3.3 Add TRX .......................................................................................................................... 3-20 3.4 Delete TRX ...................................................................................................................... 3-26 3.5 Add or Delete Board ........................................................................................................ 3-29 3.6 Modify Board Type........................................................................................................... 3-32 3.7 Modify Site Data............................................................................................................... 3-36 3.8 Modify Site's Output Property .......................................................................................... 3-39 3.9 Startup Traffic Stat. Task Re-register.............................................................................. 3-40 3.10 Rename Site or Cell.......................................................................................................3-42 3.11 Modify Ring Topology Mark........................................................................................... 3-44
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data ..................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1 Add Cell ............................................................................................................................. 4-1 4.2 Delete Cell ......................................................................................................................... 4-7 4.3 Modify BCC and NCC...................................................................................................... 4-10 4.4 Modify Cell's Property...................................................................................................... 4-13 4.5 Modify Cell's Call Control Parameter............................................................................... 4-16 4.6 Modify Cell's Alarm Limit.................................................................................................. 4-18 4.7 Modify Cell's FH Property ................................................................................................ 4-20 4.8 Modify Cell's Handover Parameter.................................................................................. 4-25
4.9 Modify Cell's Power Control Parameter........................................................................... 4-30 4.10 Modify Cell's Channel Management Parameter............................................................ 4-32 4.11 Modify Cell's CGI ........................................................................................................... 4-35 4.12 Modify Cell's System Information .................................................................................. 4-37 4.13 Modify Cell's Broadcast DRX Property .......................................................................... 4-41 4.14 Modify Cell's Install Status............................................................................................. 4-43 4.15 Modify Cell's Allocation Table (BA1 & BA2 Table) ........................................................ 4-45 4.16 Modify Double Timeslots Related Property ................................................................... 4-48 4.17 Modify TRX’s Property................................................................................................... 4-51 4.18 Modify DC Bias Voltage and RACH Min Access Level ................................................. 4-54
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 12/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Table of Contents
iii
4.19 Modify TRX’s Channel Type.......................................................................................... 4-56 4.20 Modify TRX's Frequency................................................................................................ 4-60 4.21 Modify GPRS Function .................................................................................................. 4-63 4.22 Modify TRX Priority........................................................................................................ 4-65
4.23 External Cell................................................................................................................... 4-67
4.23.1 Add External Cell ................................................................................................ 4-67 4.23.2 Delete External Cell ............................................................................................ 4-70 4.23.3 Modify External Cell ............................................................................................ 4-71
4.24 Batch Modify Cell's Network Parameter ........................................................................ 4-74 4.25 Configure RSL Flow Control Parameter........................................................................ 4-77
Appendix A Abbreviations ...........................................................................................................A-1 Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge.........................................................................................B-1
B.1 BSC Data...........................................................................................................................B-1 B.1.1 Configuration Principles and Flow..........................................................................B-1 B.1.2 Numbering Principle ...............................................................................................B-2 B.1.3 AM/CM Data Configuration.....................................................................................B-5 B.1.4 BM Data Configuration ...........................................................................................B-7
B.2 Clock Data Configuration ................................................................................................B-11 B.3 Trunk and Signaling on the A-interface...........................................................................B-12 B.4 BTS Networking...............................................................................................................B-14
B.4.1 Principle of Numbering .........................................................................................B-14 B.4.2 Introduction to BIE ................................................................................................B-16 B.4.3 Star Networking ....................................................................................................B-18 B.4.4 Chain Networking..................................................................................................B-22 B.4.5 Tree Networking....................................................................................................B-39 B.4.6 Half Rate Networking............................................................................................B-40 B.4.7 Ring Networking....................................................................................................B-43
Appendix C Correspondence Relation between Data Table and DBF Files............................C-1
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 13/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-1
Chapter 1 Overview
BSC Data Auto Configuration System adopts a graphic operation interface. With the
introduction of graphic operation interface and operation in wizard, the task of data
configuration is simplified. The BSC Data Auto Configuration System offers initial data
configuration function and dynamic data configuration function. Moreover, it also
provides data browsing function.
To perform initial configuration, use the mouse and keyboard to perform operations to
the equipment objects, such as BIEs, sites, TRXs and cells, in graphic interface, then
input necessary data configuration information to complete the data configuration.
Complex trunk and networking data are generated automatically. The cell, power
control and channel management data adopt default configuration and can be
adjusted automatically according to actual practice if necessary. The initial data
configuration process is efficient and easy to learn.
Operation tasks for dynamic data configuration are categorized according to the
on-site demands. Each task adopts wizard mode to instruct the user to complete the
complicated in-service system configuration and network parameter adjustment. The
system generates commands for dynamic configuration according to the operation
tasks the user selects.
1.1 Data Configuration Principle
I. Data Configuration Path
There are two paths to start BSC Data Auto Configuration System:
1) Start BSC Data Auto Configuration System from OMC system. In this path, we also
have two choices:
z With OMC Server, user connects to OMC Server through OMC Shell, and then
start BSC Data Auto Configuration System.
z Without OMC Server, users start OMC Local WS, select the IP address of BAM,
and then start BSC Data Auto Configuration System.
2) Start BSC Data Auto Configuration System from iManager M2000 System. There
are also two choices:
z With M2000 Server, user connects to M2000 Server through iManager M2000,
and then start BSC Data Auto Configuration System.
z Without M2000 Server, users start Local WS, select the IP address of BAM, and
then start BSC Data Auto Configuration System.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 14/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-2
Either with OMC Server(M2000 Server) or not, when BSC Data Auto Configuration
System launch, system download autocfg.dat from FTP Server at BAM to WS (Work
Station) with FTP (File Transfer Protocol); after accomplish transfer and conversion,
or accomplish dynamic configuration, load autocfg.dat from WS to FTP Server.
Data configuration principle of BSC is shown in Figure 1-1.
OMC Server OMC Shell
BAM
BSC Data Auto
Configuration
System
DBF
WS
Local WS
IP
IP
IP
FTP Server
FTP AutoCfg.dat
(iManager M2000)
OMC Server
(M2000 Server)
Figure 1-1 Data configuration principle of the BSC data auto configuration system
II. Data Category
BSC data includes BSC Data Auto Configuration System data, BAM data and FAM
data.
z BSC Data Auto Configuration System data is used when graphic data
configuration interfaces are adopted. They are saved in the file AutoCfg.dat inC:\OMC\BSC\BAM\dload\cfgdata. The data configuration files of BSC Data Auto
Configuration System are transferred from the Client to the designated directory
of BAM via FTP.
z BAM data are also saved at BAM in *.DBF and *.DAT format. *.DBF files are
saved in C:\OMC\BSC\BAM\dbf and system table files are saved in
C:\OMC\BSC\BAM\DBF\SYSTEM. The data converted from *.DBF are saved in
the directory C:\OMC\BSC\BAM\DLOAD, with the file name as DB_*.DAT. "*" of
DB_*.DAT represents module Number and one module corresponds to one data
file. Files after format conversion can be transferred to the GMPU of BSC via
channels between FAM and BAM during BSC loading or data setting.
z FAM data refer to the data saved in GMPU, adopting binary system.
Caution:
Except data for modules, there are also such important files as cc08.bsm, cc08.ctn, cc08.mcm,
cc08.mcs and cc08.snt under DLOAD directory. Data under DLOAD directory cannot be deleted and
modified through Windows Explorer during routine maintenance.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 15/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-3
The relationship between various kinds of data is illustrated in Figure 1-2.
*.dbf Autocfg.dat DB_*.DAT
BAM
Transfer Convertbin
Load
GMPU
Figure 1-2 The relationship between various kinds of data
During initial configuration, if it wants to be saved, select [File/Backup Data to] to save
the current modification. After the file for data configuration is saved, if the system
exits service abnormally before data transfer and conversion, select [File/Reload Data
from] to recover the data modified.
In initial configuration, after all the data are configured, perform transfer operation to
convert the BSC Data Auto Configuration System data into DBF format. Then convertthe DBF data into *.DAT format with conversion operation. Then finally reset all the
modules to load the data.
Note:
The file saving path in this manual refers to the default path for software installation, if there is no
dedicated description about the path.
1.2 Authority
To guarantee the stable operation of the system, strict operation authority system is
designed for the BSC Data Auto Configuration System.
I. Advanced User
The advanced users enjoy the highest operation authority of the BSC Data Auto
Configuration System. They can implement all data configuration. Advanced users of
BSC Data Auto Configuration System include users with Service Setting Authority,
users with Management Authority, users with OMC Setting Authority and users with
OMC Management Authority.
II. Ordinary User
The ordinary users can only browse data. Ordinary users of BSC Data Auto
Configuration System refer to users with Service Query Authority.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 16/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-4
Caution:
To avoid the bad impact on system for wrong data configuration or improper operation, user authority
management must be enforced properly. Different user must use different user name and password. It is
recommended that personnel proficient in the system are configured as Advanced User.
1.3 Operation Step
1) Backup AutoCfg.dat and *.dbf at BAM. The file path for AutoCfg.dat is
C:\OMC\BSC\BAM\dload\cfgdata; the file path for *.dbf is C:\OMC\BSC\BAM\dbf.
2) Prepare detailed data modification procedures and recovery measures if theoperation fails.
3) For critical dynamic configuration, first perform it in simulating environment and
check whether the refreshed DBF data table is correct, If it is correctly refreshed,
perform the operation again in actual environment.
4) If abnormality occurs during initial configuration transferring or conversion and
the operation fails, repeat the operation until it succeeds.
5) For abnormality during dynamic configuration, please refer to 1.8.2
Troubleshooting about Dynamic Configuration.
Note:
The data file AutoCfg.dat of BSC Data Auto Configuration System is saved at the directory
C:\OMC\BSC\BAM\dload\cfgdata at BAM and the system automatically backs up the file AutoCfg.dat at
3 a.m. every day.
The location of backup file: C:\Omc\SHELL\G3BSC32.10100.06.1120A\SYSDATA,
"G3BSC32.10100.06.1120A" corresponds to the software version. The style of backup file is
"030427031420.Dat", the numbers indicate "Year Month Day Hour Minute Second", each unit use two
digits.
1.4 Start the BSC Data Auto Configuration System
I. Start the BSC Data Auto Configuration System from OMC Shell
Enter the main interface [Huawei GSM OMC SHELL]. Select the corresponding BSC
icon and right-click it, the menu will appear as shown in Figure 1-3.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 17/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-5
Figure 1-3 Enter the BSC system menu
Select the [Data Configuration]. The BSC Data Auto Configuration System will obtain
data from FTP Server and enter the work mode selection interface after successful
loading, as shown in Figure 1-8.
II. Start the BSC Data Auto Configuration System from iManager M2000
Enter the main interface [iManager M2000 Integrated Network Management System].
Select the corresponding BSC icon and right-click it, the menu will appear as shown
in Figure 1-4.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 18/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-6
Figure 1-4 Enter the BSC system menu from iManager M2000
Select the [Data Auto Configuration], the interface as shown in Figure 1-5 will pop up.
Figure 1-5 Enter the NE Login interface
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 19/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-7
Input the user name and password which can login this BSC from Local WS, and click
<OK>, the BSC Data Auto Configuration System will obtain data from FTP Server and
enter the work mode selection interface after successful loading, as shown in
Figure 1-8.
III. Start the BSC Data Auto Configuration System from OMC Local WS
Select the [Start/Programs/Huawei GSM-OMC/OMC Local WS], select the IP address
of object for maintenance, as shown in Figure 1-6.
Figure 1-6 Select the BSC object for maintenance
In Figure 1-6, Click <Configure>, user can implement <Add>, <Delete> and <Update>
to object. "Name" and "IP" constitute each object. "Name" is input by user according
to the need, "IP" is input with the IP address of BAM to be maintained.
Select the object to be maintained, click <OK>, the interface of [Log in] will pop up.
Input the correct "User" and "Password", click <OK>, to enter OMC Local WS.
Select the [Start/Task/Data Configuration], as shown in Figure 1-7.
Figure 1-7 Start the BSC Data Auto Configuration System from OMC Local WS
After the BSC Data Auto Configuration System starts, it will download the data from
the FTP server in the BAM. If the data downloading and loading is successful, the
system will enter the work mode selection interface after loading data successfully, as
shown in Figure 1-8.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 20/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-8
Figure 1-8 Select the work mode of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System
Caution:
1) The data file AutoCfg.dat of BSC Data Auto Configuration System is saved in BAM, therefore, the
system always obtains data from BAM to ensure data integrity and consistency whether the BSC Data
Auto Configuration System is started from OMC Local Ws or OMC Shell.
2) Some critical operations, such as data transferring, dynamic configuration and setting specified data
table etc., will refresh the default data file AutoCfg.dat, therefore, data file AutoCfg.dat backup is
recommended before these critical operations.
IV. Enter the BSC Data Auto Configuration System the first time
After the OMC software is installed and the user enters the BSC Data Auto
Configuration System the first time, the BSC Data Auto Configuration System will
prompt the user to exit if there is no Autocfg.dat in BAM, as shown in Figure 1-9.
Figure 1-9 Prompt information if there is no Autocfg.dat in BAM
Under this case, solve the problem according to the description given in 1.8
Troubleshooting "No data for BSC Data Auto Configuration System in BAM FTP
Server of BAM".
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 21/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-9
1.5 Initial Data Configuration
Cautions:
1) The Initial Data Configuration is only being used in data configuration for new office deployment and
massive upgrading for office points.
2) After data transmission under initial data configuration mode, data conversion and BSC reset must be
performed to load the newly generated data. Otherwise, data inconsistency between Host (GMPU), DBF,
and BSC Data Auto Configuration System may occur.
Initial Data Configuration, the subscriber can finish hardware configuration on graphic
interfaces. Meanwhile, the system provides default data configuration and correlative
data through auto operation. The system also supports effective check on the inputs
of users. The subscriber only needs to input limited information of data configuration
to complete the whole data configuration for the BSC.
1.5.1 Start initial data configuration
As the advanced users (users with Service Setting Authority, users with Management
Authority, users with OMC Setting Authority and users with OMC Management
Authority) have obtained the BAM edit authority, start the BSC Data AutoConfiguration System, the work mode selection interface will pop up, as shown in
Figure 1-8. Press <Ctrl+Shift+F8> and the password authentication interface will
appear, as shown in Figure 1-10.
Figure 1-10 Password input box of the initial data configuration mode
After the correct password is input, click <OK>, the work mode selection interface will
become as shown in Figure 1-11.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 22/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-10
Figure 1-11 The activated work mode selection interface
1.5.2 Introduction to the Main Interfaces
I. Overview
The initial configuration mode of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System provides
the simple and easy-to-use GUI (Graphic User Interface). The users can configure
the corresponding BSS engineering data, trunk data, signaling data, service data and
alarm data according to the actual networking and planning requirements.
The configured data can be loaded directly to the GMPU after such operations as
transmitting and converting.
II. Main Interface
After successfully loading data of the BSC Data Auto Data Configuration system,
select "Initial data configuration work mode" and enter the main interface of initial
configuration, as shown in Figure 1-12.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 23/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-11
Figure 1-12 Main interface of initial configuration
The main interface of initial configuration consists of seven parts, i.e., the title bar, the
menu options, the toolbar, the object list, the object information, the object labels,
object property.
III. Title bar
It displays the title of the main interface.
IV. Menu
The menu options of initial configuration are shown in Table 1-1.
Table 1-1 Functions of the main menus of initial configuration
Menu option Function File
Including some function items of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System, such as systemsetting, data backup, data loading, transfer, conversion, etc.
ViewSet the switches of the status volume, the tool bar. View the cell networking mode and quickquery the cell and site.
HelpThe on-line help and version and copyright information of the BSC Data Auto ConfigurationSystem.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 24/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-12
V. Toolbar
The tool bar of initial data configuration is shown in Figure 1-13.
Figure 1-13 Icons of the tool bar
The meanings of the various tool bar icons are shown in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2 Meanings of the tool bar icons
Tool Icon Function Set the device type (single-mode device/multi-modes device) and the number of
modules of the multi-modes device. As for single-mode device, select whether to usethe SM multiplex mode or not.
Transfer the BSC data configured in the BSC Data Auto Configuration System to BAM.Refresh DBF data. After transferring the data successfully, it is mandatory to convert thedata and reset BSC.
Convert the DBF data of BAM to DAT file so that the host can read the data.
Refresh the data configured in the BSC Data Auto Configuration System. This button isnot usable by default.
Display the version and copyright information of the BSC Data Auto ConfigurationSystem.
VI. Object labels
The labels include those of the local office information, the hardware devices, the site
devices, the cell property, and the cell networking, etc. The meanings of the labels are
shown in Table 1-3.
Table 1-3 Meanings of the object labels
Object label Function Local officeinformation
Configure the data of the local office. Meanwhile, maintain the tables of alarm parameters,SPC, site software index, common parameters and flow control, etc.
HardwareDisplay the currently selected AM/CM. BM hardware configuration. It can implement theoperations of adding, deleting board and frame, etc. And configure the properties of thecorresponding board.
Site deviceDisplay the currently selected site hardware configuration. It can implement the operations of adding, deleting board, etc. User can also configure the properties of the corresponding boardhere.
Cell propertyConfigure cell data, including CGI, BCC and NCC, effective frequencies, optimizing networkdata, and FH data, etc.
Cell adjacentrelationship
Display all the cell networking structure and adjacent relations, etc.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 25/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-13
VII. Object list
Object navigation tree. It displays all the modules, sites, cell object lists in the array of
modules, sites and cell structures.
VIII. Object information
Object information is displayed for the objects selected by the user in object list. If the
object selected is site, object information including site name, site ID, site type and
number of racks will be displayed. If the object selected is cell, cell name and cell
Number will be displayed. If the object selected is board, board type, board No.,
frame Number and slot Number will be displayed.
1.5.3 Data Backup and Reloading
I. Overview
Save and backup data can be performed to the server or the WS and the function of
data reloading is also usable. See Table 1-4.
Table 1-4 Sub-menu options of data saving and backup
Menu option Function Backup data to the server
Backup data to FTP server at BAM. User can select the name of the backup file.
Usually it is not allowed to cover the AutoCfg.dat. It is applicable to initialconfiguration and dynamic configuration.
Backup data to the localBackup data in WS. User can select the name of the backup file. Usually it is notallowed to cover the AutoCfg.dat. It is applicable to initial configuration anddynamic configuration.
Reload data from the server Reload all the configuration information of the BSC Data Auto ConfigurationSystem from the data saved at the BAM (the file name is selectable). It isapplicable to the initial configuration mode.
Reload data from the localReload all the configuration data of the BSC Data Auto Configuration Systemfrom the data saved at the WS (the file name is selectable). It is applicable to theinitial configuration mode.
The data saving and recovery mechanism of BSC Data Auto Configuration System
has nothing related to the user login mode (whether log in from OMC Shell or OMC
Local WS). No matter where the users log in the system, BSC Data Auto
Configuration System will save the data in the FTP Server of the BAM.
The BSC Data Auto Configuration System saves the data into a designated directory
of the BAM to ensure the security, validity and exclusiveness of the data source.
Note:
Server described in the above is BAM, because FTP Server is running at BAM, it is called server of BSC
Data Auto Configuration System.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 26/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-14
II. Data Backup and Reloading
1) Backup data to the server
Select the [File/Backup Data to/FTP Server], the interface will pop up as shown in
Figure 1-14. The user may select the name of the saved file. However, it is not
allowed to cover or delete the default data file AutoCfg.dat.
Figure 1-14 Backup data to the server
If the user selects to save using the file name AutoCfg.dat, the system will prompt the
following information, as shown in Figure 1-15.
Figure 1-15 Confirm of covering the default configuration file
Note:
The backup file is saved at "C:\Omc\BSC\BAM\dload\cfgdata" of BAM.
2) Backup data to the WS
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 27/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-15
Select [File/Backup Data to/Local], the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 1-16.
The user may select the name of the saved file. But it is not allowed to cover the
default data file AutoCfg.dat or other system files under this directory.
Figure 1-16 Backup data at the WS
If the user selects AutoCfg.dat or other system file names for saving, the system will
prompt the information as shown in Figure 1-17 respectively.
Figure 1-17 Confirm of covering the system file
3) Reload data from the FTP server
In the initial configuration mode, select [File/Reload Data from/FTP Server], theinterface will pop up as shown in Figure 1-18. The user may select any file name for
data reloading.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 28/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-16
Figure 1-18 Recover data from the server
4) Reload data from the WSSelect the [File/Reload Data From/Local], the interface will pop up as shown in
Figure 1-19. It is only allowed to select data configuration files for reloading. Under
this directory, there are also a lot of system configuration files, which cannot be
deleted.
Figure 1-19 Reload data from the WS
If the file name for data reloading selected by the user does not meet the related
requirements, e.g., the data file is not complete or is not data configuration file, the
system will prompt the following information. See Figure 1-20.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 29/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-17
Figure 1-20 Reload data from the WS failed
III. AutoCfg.dat Loading Procedure
When the BSC Data Auto Configuration System is started from OMC Shell, it first
downloads AutoCfg.Dat data file from BAM to the sysdata directory in WS, the original
AutoCfg.Dat data file in the WS is overwritten. And then it loads all the data from AutoCfg.Dat file in the sysdata directory in WS, i.e., generates all the configuration
information displayed in the graphic interfaces. If the connection to the BAM is
interrupted, or the application in FTP Server in BAM is not started, the BSC Data Auto
Configuration System will prompt the user to automatically exit the application.
Caution:
Some important operations such as data transfer or dynamic setting, etc., will refresh the default data file
AutoCfg.dat. Therefore, it is recommended to backup the AutoCfg.dat before these operations.
1.5.4 Modification of System Parameters
I. Overview
The function of modifying system parameters enables the users to modify some
parameter values, including transfer, conversion, dynamic setting timeout threshold,
the number of communication frame sliding windows for adding or deleting DBF data,
etc. so as to improve efficiency of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System. It is
recommended not to easily change these parameters at random. The default values
can be used generally.
II. Introduction to the Operations
In the menu bar of the main interface of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System,
click [File/Set System Property]. The dialog will pop up as shown in Figure 1-21.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 30/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-18
Figure 1-21 Modifying the system parameters
The user can modify the system timeout properties in the interface.
Set system timeout property including the timeout properties setting of transfer,conversion, dynamic setting, etc. The meanings of the various properties are shown
in Table 1-5.
Table 1-5 Meanings of the various properties of system timeout
System Property Meaning Single message timeoutthreshold (ms)
Set the timeout threshold of single message. Modification of the value will affecttimeout of the transfer operation (for details, refer to Note). The value can be larger properly when the network status is poor. The default value is 200.
Flow control slide windowfor adding data
Set the number of slide windows for adding data. Control flow of the BAM. If the dataof BAM are too large, the value can be decreased properly so as to decrease impact
to flow load of BAM. The default value is 12.Flow control slide windowfor deleting data
Set the number of slide windows for deleting data. Control flow of the BAM. If the dataof BAM are too large, the value can be decreased properly so as to decrease impactto flow load of BAM. The default value is 2.
BAM data table conversiontimeout property(s)
Set the timeout of transfer. The value can be increased properly when the networkstatus is poor. The default value is 60.
Dynamic setting timeoutthreshold(s)
Set the timeout of dynamic setting. The value can be increased properly when thenetwork status is poor. The default value is 120.
Lock BAM TimeoutThreshold(s)
Set the timeout of BSC Data Auto Configuration System locking BAM. The value canbe increased properly when the network status is poor. The default vlue is 5.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 31/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-19
Note:
It takes long time for BAM to execute the OMC_DELETE command. Therefore, the number of Flow
control slide window for deleting data cannot be set too large.
1.5.5 Data Transfer and Conversion
I. Overview
The data configured in the BSC Data Auto Configuration System can be transferred to
BAM with the transfer operation. Refresh the entire DBF table of BAM. Then convert
the DBF data of BAM to the file that can be loaded to GMPU in the BSC host. Resetthe BSC and load the data.
II. Procedure Introduction
1) Operation procedure of transferring data
z System firstly verifies if all the data are correct (e.g., whether the CGI is repetitive,
whether the RC has been allocated with frequencies, etc). Calculate all the data
according to the current configuration, (e.g., the Number of various boards, radio
channel configuration table, LAPD signal connection table and LAPD semi-fixed
connection table, etc).
z Send OMC_DELETE communication frame to BAM. Clear all the DBF data of
BAM by BAM. If the data table to be refreshed is specified, the data table to be
cleared is the specified data table.
z According to the current configuration information, the BSC Data Auto
Configuration System will automatically calculate the data to be filled into the
DBF data table and encapsulate them to data frames and send to BAM. Then
BAM will fill the data to the data tables.
z After the entire transfer operation, the BSC Data Auto Configuration System will
automatically save the AutoCfg.Dat at WS, and then load it to FTP Server with
FTP.
z If it is unsuccessful to load file to FTP Server, don't exit the BSC Data Auto
Configuration System, and keep the locking of current client to BAM. After
resolve the fault of FTP Server, Select [File/Backup Data to/FTP Server], select
autocfg.dat for the file name.
2) Operation procedure of data conversion
After the transfer in the BSC Data Auto Configuration System, user must implement
conversion and resetting of whole BSC. System sends a converting command to
BAM. Then, BAM will implement data conversion.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 32/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-20
1.5.6 Export Network Parameter
I. Overview
The network parameter configured in the BSC Data Auto Configuration System can
be export to designated file. It can be used to save the network parameter based on
actual environment.
II. Procedure Introduction
1) Select [File/Export Network Parameter], as shown in Figure 1-22.
Figure 1-22 Export Network Parameter
2) Select designated cell, click <Export Parameter>, save the network parameter of
designated cells.
1.5.7 Import Network Parameter
I. Overview
The Network Parameter can be imported into the BSC Data Auto Configuration
System. It used to reuse the data exported from later version.
II. Procedure Introduction
1) Select [File/Import Network Parameter], and then select the designated file.
2) Click <Open> to complete the importing.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 33/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-21
1.5.8 Report Cell Information to Server
I. Overview
After transferring data in initial data configuration. system report automatically cell
information to OMC Server for traffic statistic. User can manually report all cell
information of BSC to OMC Server by selecting [File/Report Cell Information to
Server],.
II. Procedure Introduction
Select [File/Report Cell Information to Server] to complete the operation.
1.5.9 Operation Introduction
I. Operation of data transfer
In the toolbar of the main interface of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System, click
or select [File/Transfer Data Table]. The following dialog box as shown in
Figure 1-23 will pop up.
Figure 1-23 Interface of transfer data operation
In this interface, press <Ctrl + Shift + F6>, activate <Yes>.
Click <Yes> to implement the data transfer operation, as shown in Figure 1-24.
Figure 1-24 Box indicating the process of data transfer
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 34/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-22
Caution:
During the transfer procedure, it is prohibited to exit in a forced manner from the transfer operations,
including such operations as shutting down, exiting from the BSC Data Auto Configuration System in a
forced manner, etc. In case of power failure during the refreshing procedure, it is mandatory to
re-implement data operation after the power is recovered. It is mandatory that this operation must
succeed for one time.
If the network status is poor, and the refreshing procedure exits due to timeout, the
following dialog box will appear as shown in Figure 1-25.
Figure 1-25 Prompt box of timeout of the transfer operation
In this case, add properly the single message timeout threshold (ms).
When data transfer is completed, the dialog box as shown in Figure 1-26 will appear,
indicating that transfer has succeeded.
Figure 1-26 Transferring data succeeded
II. Operation of data conversion
In the toolbar of the main interface of initial configuration of the BSC Data Auto
Configuration System, click or select [File/Convert Data Table]. The dialog
box as shown in Figure 1-27 will pop up.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 35/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-23
Figure 1-27 Interface of data conversion
In this interface, press <Ctrl + Shift + F6>, activate <Yes>.
Click <Yes> to implement the data conversion operation, as shown in Figure 1-28.
Figure 1-28 Box indicating the process of data conversion
After the conversion operation is completed, the dialog box as shown in Figure 1-29
will pop up.
Figure 1-29 Converting data succeeded
Click <OK> to complete the data conversion operation. Reset BSC to load data and
complete the entire data configuration.
Conversion may fail if the network status is poor. The dialog box shown in Figure 1-30
will appear.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 36/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-24
Figure 1-30 Prompt box of timeout of the conversion operation
In this case, increase the timeout threshold of BAM data table conversion.
III. View value range
During initial configuration or dynamic configuration, users can conveniently view the
value range of parameters. Move the cursor to the edit box of a parameter, the value
range of the parameter will be displayed after a while, as shown in Figure 1-31.
Figure 1-31 View parameter value range
1.6 Dynamic Data Configuration
Dynamic Data Configuration enables the user to modify the data of the GMPU and
BTS without resetting the GMPU in the BSC.
The Dynamic data configuration adopts the wizard operation mode, guiding the user
to complete the complicated on-line BSS system configuration and dynamically
modify the network parameters. Dynamic data configuration applies a reasonably
arranged Man-Machine Interface for the user to fill in configuration data step by step.
The BSC Data Auto Configuration System then sends data frames of operation data
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 37/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-25
table to BAM. The BAM finishes the entire data configuration for BSC offices by
adding, deleting, and modifying the data tables in BAM.
Generally it is used in daily maintenance, such as dynamic addition/deletion of BTS,
cell and RC, dynamic modification of the network optimization parameters.
1.6.1 Start Dynamic Data Configuration
In Figure1-6 select the work mode of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System, and
then select "System dynamical configuration work mode". An interface requiring
password input will pop up, as shown in Figure 1-32.
Figure 1-32 Dynamic data configuration password input
Input the correct password and click <OK>, enter the main interface of dynamic
configuration. As shown in Figure 1-33.
1.6.2 Main Interface Introduction
Apart from those common parts of an interface, such as title bar, menu and tool bar,
etc. The interface of dynamic data configuration adopts a wizard operation mode.
Each dynamic configuration operation usually includes several successive steps. The
"Operation Step" displays all steps necessary for the operation. The name of current
configuration step is displayed in blue.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 38/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-26
Figure 1-33 Dynamic data configuration working mode main interface
I. Menu
Menu option Function
OptionContains such functional items as system configuration, data backup, data loading and
Refresh Selected Tables, etc. for Dynamic data configuration system.BSC Contains the Dynamic setting operation items at BSC level.
Site Contains the Dynamic setting operation items at BTS level.
Cell Contains the Dynamic setting operation items at cell level.
Help Contains version of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System.
II. Toolbar
Tool icon Function
The system attributes is used to control the flow and communication timeout whilethe BSC Data Auto Configuration System communicates with BAM
Used for Reloading data from the autocfg.dat at WS.
Exit BSC Data Auto Configuration System
III. Task Name
Display the name of current executing dynamical configuration task.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 39/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-27
IV. Operation Step
Display all the operation step to accomplish a dynamical configuration task, the
executing step is displayed in blue.
V. Operation Interface
It is the display area of the wizard operation interface. All operation of a dynamical
configuration task is completed in the area.
VI. Status Bar
The greeting message and the information about the company are displayed in this
area.
1.6.3 Data Backup
The data backup function is provided in the dynamic configuration mode. The data
backup includes [Backup Data to/FTP Server] and [Backup Data to/Local]. As shown
in Figure 1-34.
Figure 1-34 Data backup menu
The data backup operation is the same as that described in 1.5.3 Data Backup and
Reloading.
1.6.4 Report Cell Information to Server
After dynamic adding/deleting site, dynamic adding/deleting cell, or dynamic
modifying cell CGI, etc. system report automatically cell information to OMC Server
for Traffic Statistic. Select [Option/Report Cell Information to Server], user can
manually report all cell information of BSC to OMC Server.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 40/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-28
1.6.5 Refresh Selected Tables
To avoid the DBF be empty in BAM because of network or FTP failure, the Dynamic
Data Configuration System supports refreshing selected tables to make the DBF inBAM consistent to the data of Dynamic Data Configuration System, To perform this
function, the user can select [Option/Refresh Selected Tables], then the interface as
shown in Figure 1-35 will pop up.
Figure 1-35 Refresh Selected Tables
First, the user select options, then select the tables to be refreshed from “Table List 0”
to “Refresh Tables 0”, and the user can select whether the selected tables should be
set to host. At last, click the button <OK> to complete the operation.
1.6.6 Dynamic Configuration Procedure
I. With command
BSC Data Auto Configuration System generates all data for BSC table according to
this dynamic configuration. BAM data table will be refreshed according to the
corresponding ID of the Command word. "Refresh" means to clear the data table first,
then to fill in all data record generated this time in turn. The Command word is
requested to be filled into the Command Reference Table, then the corresponding
data table and command line parameter will be set to the present module (BM), and
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 41/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-29
data will be stored into the configuration files of the BSC Data Auto Configuration
System. The step is described as the first setting in the following text.
If part of the data tables need to be sent to all modules (BM), the BSC Data Auto
Configuration System will refresh these data tables and clear the record in the table of
command line parameters. Then these data tables (including the empty table of
command line parameters) will then be set to all modules (BM), and configuration
data will again be stored into the configuration files of the BSC Data Auto
Configuration System. The step is described as the second setting in the following
text.
Sending data tables to all modules is also called Inter-module Broadcast.
Secondary setting can be performed for the following dynamic operations. Such as
add/delete sites, add/delete cells, add/delete TRXs, add/delete external cells, modifyexternal cell property, modify interface phase flag, modify cell handover parameters,
modify cell FH attributes, modify cell BCC and NCC, modify TRX channel type,
modify TRX frequencies, modify cell installation status and modify voice optimization
parameters.
The procedure of batch modify cell parameters is same as the procedure described in
above. System generates the corresponding commands, the configuration procedure
is determined by the commands.
II. Without command
BSC Data Auto Configuration System generates all data for BSC table according to
this dynamic configuration without command. BAM data table will be refreshed
according to the corresponding ID of the current configuration. And then the
corresponding data table will be set to all BM, and data will be stored into the
configuration files of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System.
1.7 Data Browsing
Main interface of data browsing working mode is the same as that of the initial dataconfiguration. This makes it convenient for user to understand the present BSC
networking architecture and network planning data.
In the browsing mode, user is allowed to perform modification to the system
configuration, but all changes will not be saved.
Click<Transfer>, the interface will pop up, as shown in Figure 1-36.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 42/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-30
Figure 1-36 Information prompting that data cannot be transferred
Click <Convert>, the interface shown in Figure 1-37 will pop up.
Figure 1-37 Information prompting that data cannot be converted
Select [File/Backup Data to/FTP Server] or [Backup Data to/Local], the interface
shown in Figure 1-38 will pop up.
Figure 1-38 Information prompting that data cannot be saved
In the case of system maintenance and engineer training, this mode can be adopted
to prevent the operators from mis-operating the system.
Note:
It is recommended to use the browse mode when viewing the networking data even for the advanced
user, so as to prevent any mis-operation which may affect the normal running of the BSC.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 43/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-31
1.8 Troubleshooting
1.8.1 Troubleshooting with Starting
I. Loading Fault
If information shown in Figure 1-39 appears when the BSC Data Auto Configuration
System is started, it indicates data loading failure.
Figure 1-39 BSC Data Auto Configuration System start failure information
There are two causes for this failure:
One is that the FTP Server has not been started. Check whether there is FTP Server
icon in Tray of Task Bar in BAM Windows, as shown in Figure 1-40. If the FTP Server
has not been started, double click the Ftps.exe under the directory
C:\OMC\BSC\BAM.
Figure 1-40 FTP Server in-service icon
The second cause is poor network quality. Since the BSC Data Auto Configuration
System obtains data first from the BAM when it is started, it might fail to obtain data if
the network quality is poor. To solve this problem, just wait for a while, then restart the
BSC Data Auto Configuration System.
II. Version not identical
When the BSC Data Auto Configuration System loads data, it will implement
consistency checking of the version of AutoCfg.dat and the version of the current BSC
Data Auto Configuration System. If they are inconsistent, the following warning will
pop up, as shown in Figure 1-41.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 44/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-32
Figure 1-41 Inconsistency between the program version and the data version
Click <OK>. BSC Data Auto Configuration System is downward compatible, if the
version of the current BSC data auto configuration system is higher than the version
of the configuration file (AutoCfg.dat), the program can run normally. Otherwise, theprompt of unknown object will appear. The BSC Data Auto Configuration System
might become abnormal and cannot be used.
Note:
1) Please update the version of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System and make it matching with the
data version. If the problem appears during upgrading, ignore the prompt.
2) After transfer operation is performed in BSC Data Auto Configuration System, the version of the
program and that of the data become consistent. Therefore, the prompt information as shown in
Figure 1-41 will not appear again.
III. No data for BSC Data Auto Configuration System in BAM FTP Server of
BAM
When the user first starts the BSC Data Auto Configuration System and there is no
configuration file of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System in the BAM FTP Server,
the BSC Data Auto Configuration System will prompt the user to automatically exit the
system. Under this case, the user can copy the old AutoCfg.Dat file to the directory
C:\OMC\BSC\BAM\DLOAD\CFGDATA in BAM (this is the directory specified for file
transferring in FTP Server). If there is no old AutoCfg.Dat file, the user can edit any
non-empty data file and save it as AutoCfg.Dat file, then copy it to this directory. The
BSC Data Auto Configuration System will be started normally and prompts the user to
create default data, as shown in Figure 1-42.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 45/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-33
Figure 1-42 Information prompting incomplete data file
Click <OK>, the user can enter the interface shown in Figure 1-43 to select the
working mode of the configuration system.
Figure 1-43 Select working mode of the configuration system
In this interface, "System Dynamic Configuration Work Mode" is unusable, for the
data the system creates by default is that of a single module BSC and the dynamicdata configuration mode is prohibited to prevent users from setting incorrect data to
the GMPU.
Users can start initial data configuration in the BSC Data Auto Configuration System
to edit and transfer the data, convert and load data to GMPU. Then restart the BSC
Data Auto Configuration System, and "System Dynamic Configuration Work Mode"
can be usable.
IV. Login authority
The login authority of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System is based on the user
management authority of OMC Shell or OMC Local WS. The advanced users ( users
with Service Setting Authority, users with Management Authority, users with OMC
Setting Authority and users with OMC Management Authority) can enter any work
mode of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System. If the user does not have the
authority to log in OMC Shell or OMC Local WS, the following information may appear,
as shown in Figure 1-44.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 46/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-34
Figure 1-44 Prompt when the user without authority to start the BSC Data Auto Configuration System
Click <OK>, the user can only enter the view data configuration work mode of the
BSC Data Auto Configuration System, as shown in Figure 1-45.
Figure 1-45 The user can only enter the view data configuration work mode
Caution:
To endure the stable service of BSS, OMC grants different levels of authority to its users, and the BSC
Data Auto Configuration System also provides password authentication mechanism. Only users who
have passed the password authentication of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System can be allowed to
start dynamic configuration or initial configuration.
V. Edit lock of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System
DBF data chaos may be caused if multiple clients implement data configuration of the
same BAM simultaneously. Therefore, only the login users who have the OMC
management authority and data setting authority can perform BAM edit lock. All the
other login users of other clients can only enter the "View data configuration work
mode" of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System. The following prompt will appear
as shown in Figure 1-46 when the user who does not have the edit lock authority
starts the BSC Data Auto Configuration System.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 47/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-35
Figure 1-46 Data configuration on the BAM that is locked
The IP address of login computer and the user name is displayed in Figure 1-46.
Only after the client exit the BSC Data Auto Configuration System, the BAM will be
unlocked, new users can reenter the system and obtain the authority of data
modification.
If the Client with editing authority exits abnormally, find the corresponding computer of
the Client according to the IP address displayed when other Clients entered the BSC
Data Auto Configuration System. Start the BSC Data Auto Configuration System to
enter dynamic configuration mode, then exit normally, the BAM will be unlocked.
Caution:
Do not shut down the BSC Data Auto Configuration System by directly shutting down OMC Shell or
OMC Local WS. The correct way should be: first shut down the BSC Data Auto Configuration System,
then shut down OMC Shell or OMC Local WS.
1.8.2 Troubleshooting about Dynamic Configuration
I. Timeout Processing
In the process of dynamic configuration, the abnormal network will lead to, data table
refreshing timeout, data table setting timeout, and dynamic configuration can not be
completed. An exit from the BSC Data Auto Configuration System will cause disparity
between the GMPU/BAM data and the BSC Data Auto Configuration System data.
Processing Method:
Do not exit from the BSC Data Auto Configuration System! Before exiting the
interface, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to secure a successful result
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 48/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-36
II. Abnormal Break Processing
During the process of dynamic configuration, a sudden break-down or power failure of
a client terminal may result in an abnormal exit from the BSC Data Auto Configuration
System.
Processing Method:
z With abnormal situations that occurred before clicking <Start Dynamic
Configuration>, just restart the dynamic configuration.
z With abnormal situations that occurred before saving the data successfully
configured for the first time, the configuration files of the BSC Data Auto
Configuration System have not been refreshed. Re-enter the BSC Data Auto
Configuration System and conduct the same operation as the previous one, then
return.z With abnormal situations that occurred before saving the data successfully
configured for the second time (i.e., the inter-module broadcast), the
configuration files of the BSC Data Auto Configuration System have already
been refreshed. In the initial data configuration mode, refresh [Cell Description
Data Table], [Cell Module Information Table], [External Cell Description Table]
and [Frequency Hopping Data Table] and send them to all modules. If the
dynamic operation is to modify the mark of interface section or the parameter of
voice optimization, set [Local Office Information Table] to all modules.
Note:
During dynamic configuration, all modules being configured data of the multi-module BSC must be in
service. Otherwise, timeout will occur to the dynamic configuration.
III. FTP Server Interrupted during dynamic configuration
Follow the following procedures when the configuration file of the BSC Data Auto
Configuration System has not been saved to BAM due to the interruption of FTP
Server during the whole process of dynamic configuration.
1) Do not exit the BSC Data Auto Configuration System and keep the BAM in
"locked" state to prevent other Clients enter dynamic data configuration mode to
modify the data. If the user exit the BSC Data Auto Configuration System under
this case, other Clients may enter the editing state of the BSC Data Auto
Configuration System, modify and set the data, so that data inconsistency
between BAM and FAM may be incurred.
2) After FTP Server is recovered, back up the data in FTP server by selecting
[Options/Backup Data to/FTP Server]. Note that the name of the backup data file
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 49/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 1 Overview
1-37
is AutoCfg.Dat. In this scenario, the BSC Data Auto Configuration System will
prompt the user to overwrite the file, as shown in Figure 1-47.
Figure 1-47 Prompt information when default data configuration file is overwritten
Select <Yes>, and then back up the data as AutoCfg.Dat. Then, the data obtained by
other Clients from FTP Server will be the data updated after the successful setting.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 50/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-1
Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
Modify the configuration data of BSC online without impacting system running.
2.1 Modify BIE Visibility
I. Function
1) Change the visibility of BIE online. The options of visibility include visibility and
invisibility. In general, the configuration of boards such as BIE and GLAP at BSC
Data Auto Configuration System adopts full configuration mode, i.e., the visibility
of the board not configured is set as invisible and cannot be deleted in the initial
data configuration. After the visibility of BIE is changed from invisible to visible,
more sites can be added onto BIE.
2) One dynamic configuration can modify the visibility of many BIEs in one module.
In the multi-module BSC, the transparent-transmission BIE cannot be set as
invisible.
II. Preparation
Be sure that the BIE whose visibility is to be modified has been configured in theinitial data configuration mode, for the dynamic configuration system does not support
adding or deleting of BIE.
III. Procedure
For example, follow the procedures below to set the BIEs numbered as 4 and 5 in
BM1 visible, and the ones numbered as 7, 8 and 9 invisible.
1) Select the [BSC/Modify BIE Board's Visibility], the interface will pop up as shown in
Figure 2-1.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 51/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-2
Figure 2-1 Select the module and the board contained in the module
Note:
1) The BIEs listed in Figure 2-1 are not connected to any site except for the transparent-transmission
BIE. The transparent-transmission BIE cannot be set as invisible.
2) The “No.1” in “No.1 BIE board ” in the first row of the BIE selection box shown in Figure 2-1 indicates
the board number of BIE.
3) Multiple BIEs can be selected at one time by pressing <Ctrl> or <Shift>.
2) In Figure 2-1, select “Module 1” in the [Select Module] drop-down list. In [Select
BIE Board] box, select “No.4 BIE Board, Invisible”, “No.5 BIE Board, Invisible”, “No.7
BIE Board, Visible”, “No.8 BIE Board, Visible”, and “No.9 BIE Board, Visible”. After all
steps are finished, the No.7, No.8 and No.9 BIE will be changed into invisible, the
No.4 and No.5 BIE will be changed into visible.
3) Click <Next> to enter the dynamic configuration interface. The commands will be
automatically written into [Command Line Parameter Table]. See Figure 2-2.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 52/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-3
Figure 2-2 Dynamic configuration BIE’s visibility
After clicking button <Browse Command Table>, all the dynamic configuration
operation commands and the data table ID involved in each dynamic configuration
operation can be seen, as shown in Figure 2-3.
Figure 2-3 Dynamically setting command and related data table of each command
If some operations have been found incorrect up to this point, click <Previous> to
select the module and BIE again.
4) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration to
GMPU.
IV. Verification
1) Check the status of the BIE through the BSC Maintenance System after
modification.
2) Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management
System” to check the data table and the data of GMPU.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 53/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-4
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Slot Description Table]
Note:
All the data tables that concern the dynamic configuration are described in “Tables involved in BSC Data
Management System”, i.e., the data tables are the ones which will be refreshed and set to GMPU in this
dynamic configuration. The meaning of the reference data tables described in the following chapters is
the same as this, and will not give the details.
2.2 Modify LAPD Board's Visibility
I. Function
This function is used to display or conceal the GLAP already configured in initial data
configuration. After transforming GLAP from "invisible" into "visible", LAPD links can
be assigned to GLAP. One dynamic configuration can modify the visibility of multiple
GLAPs in one module.
II. Preparation
Make sure that the GALP whose visibility is to be modified has been configured at
BSC Data Auto Configuration System. Dynamic adding or deleting of GALP is not
supported in the system.
III. Procedure
For example, set the GLAP numbered as 6 in BM1 invisible and the one numbered as
7 visible.
1) Select the [BSC/Modify LAPD Board's Visibility], the interface will pop up as shown
in Figure 2-4.
Note:
1). All LAPDs here refer to GLAP.
2) Multiple GLAPs can be selected at one time by pressing <Ctrl> or <Shift>.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 54/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-5
Figure 2-4 Select GLAP
Caution:
1). Figure 2-4 lists GLAPs that are not in service. There is no signaling link assigned to these LAPDs.
2) The “No.6” in “No.6 GLAP Board Visible” in the first row of the selection box shown in Figure 2-4
indicates the board number of GLAP. “Visible” indicates the visibility of the current GLAP.
2) In Figure 2-4, select “Module 1” in the [Select Module] drop-down list. In [Select
Lapd Board] box, select “No.6 GLAP Board, Visible” and “No.7 GLAP Board, Invisible”,
3) Click <Next> to enter the dynamic configuration interface. The commands will be
automatically written into [Command Line Parameter Table]. At this step, if some
operations are found incorrect, clicking <Previous> can re-select the module and
GLAP. And make sure that all settings are correct, and then click <Start Dynamic
Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration to GMPU as shown in
Figure 2-5.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 55/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-6
Figure 2-5 Command list during the process of dynamic configuration
IV. Verification
1) Check the status of the GLAP through BSC Maintenance System after modification.
2) Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System”
to check the data table and the data of GMPU.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Slot description table]
2.3 Modify BSC Interface Phase ID
I. Function
This function is used to modify the GSM protocol standard adopted by all interfaces ,
including A interface version, Abis interface version and Um interface version.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
For example, modify Abis interface version as GSM_Phase_2.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 56/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-7
1) Select the [BSC/Modify BSC Interface Phase Flag], the interface will pop up as
shown in Figure 2-6.
Figure 2-6 Interface for the configuration of interface property
2) Modify Abis interface version as “GSM_Phase_2” in [Interface Property], then click
<Next> to enter the dynamic configuration interface as shown in Figure 2-7.
Figure 2-7 Command list during the process of dynamic configuration
3) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of the
phase flag of the BSC interface.
IV. Verification
Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System” to
check the data table.
Select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to check the host data to see whether the
related data has been set to every module.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 57/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-8
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Local office information table]
2.4 Modify Voice Optimization Parameter
I. Function
This function is used to modify the BSC voice encoding and decoding method.
“Normal Encode/Decode” and “Support TFO” are supported in BSC. Different
methods provide different conversation quality.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [BSC/Modify Voice Optimization Parameter], the interface will pop up as
shown in Figure 2-8.
Figure 2-8 Interface of voice code optimization
2) Select “Normal Encode/Decode” in the [Voice Encode/Decode Optimization] drop-
down list, then click <Next> to enter the dynamic configuration interface as shown in
Figure 2-9.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 58/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-9
Figure 2-9 Command list during the process of dynamic configuration
3) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of
voice Optimization Parameter.
IV. Verification
Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System” to
check the data table.
Select the [Local-office/Local Office Information Table] to check the [Local office
information table] and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to check the host
data to see whether the related data has been set to every module.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Local office information table]
2.5 Modify BSC BIE CRC4 Check
I. Function
This function is used to modify BSC BIE CRC4 check. The value of all BSC BIEs that
have been configured in initial data configuration work mode can be modified in one
dynamic operation.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 59/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-10
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
For example, change BSC BIE CRC4 check of BSC BIE whose group No. is 0 in
module 1 into 110011, change BSC BIE CRC4 check of BSC BIE whose group No. is
2 in module 2 into 001100.
1) Select the [BSC/Modify BSC BIE CRC4 Check], the interface will pop up as shown
in Figure 2-10.
Figure 2-10 Modify CRC4
First select the BIE whose group No. is 0 in module 1 in left box in Figure 2-10, then
select port 0, port 1, port 4, port 5 with mouse in right box, which represents the value
of selected BIE is 110011.
Select the BIE whose group No. is 2 in module 2 in left box in Figure 2-10, then select
port 2, port 3 with mouse in right box, which represents the value of selected BIE is
001100.
2) After all the BSC BIE CRC4 check configuration is completed, click <Next> shownin Figure 2-10. In the wizard interface, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to
implement the dynamic configuration of BSC BIE CRC4 check.
IV. Verification
Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System” to
check the data table.
Check the following data tables and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to
check the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 60/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-11
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[BSC BIE active/stby. group table], [BSC BIE description table].
2.6 Configure Monitor Timeslot
I. Function
This function is used to configure monitor timeslot. User can configure monitor
timeslot by two methods: auto calculate or manual mode. If the site to be configured
monitor timeslot is manual mode, user can only configure by manual mode, on theother hand, user can only configure by auto calculate.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure of manual mode
1) Select the [BSC/Configure Monitor Timeslot], the interface will pop up as shown in
Figure 2-11.
Figure 2-11 Select BIE Board (Configure Monitor Timeslot by manual mode)
Note:
Only the BIE that has configured sites can be selected in Figure 2-11. Otherwise the button <Next> will
be unusable.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 61/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-12
2) After BIE board is selected, click <Next> in Figure 2-11, the interface will pop up as
shown in Figure 2-12.
Figure 2-12 Select BIE Port (Configure Monitor Timeslot by manual mode)
Select BIE port has connected sites that need configure monitor timeslot. If the
selected BIE port connects no site or site is not manual mode, the button <Next> will
be unusable.
Note:
User can not click <Site Monitor Timeslot> to add monitor timeslot when configure monitor timeslot by
manual mode, otherwise the button <Next> will be unusable. Here, the button <Site Monitor Timeslot> is
used to delete the existing monitor timeslot configured by auto calculate for in case.
3) After BIE port is selected, click <Next> shown in Figure 2-12, the interface will pop
up as shown in Figure 2-13.
Figure 2-13 Configure Monitor Timeslot (Configure Monitor Timeslot by manual mode)
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 62/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-13
Select the site which need configure monitor timeslot, then configure site trunk mode
description, semi-permanent connection and BIE port property etc. step by step. If
relay mode of selected BIE is full rate ring topology, 6 E1 port half rate topology or
half rate ring topology, BSC BIE semi-permanent connection must be configured atthe same time.
Note:
1) If the selected site has been configured idle timeslots in initial data configuration work mode, the
button <Idle Timeslot> will be usable, the idle timeslot of the selected site can be adjusted.
2) All the information must be input manually and must assure its correctness.
4) After all the monitor timeslot information configuration is completed, click <Next>
shown in Figure 2-13. In the wizard interface, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to
implement the dynamic configuration of monitor timeslot.
IV. Procedure of auto calculate mode
1) Select the [BSC/Configure Monitor Timeslot], the interface will pop up as shown in
Figure 2-14.
Figure 2-14 Select BIE Board (Configure Monitor Timeslot by auto calculate mode)
Note:
Only the BIE that has configured sites can be selected in Figure 2-14. Otherwise the button <Next> will
be unusable.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 63/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-14
2) After BIE board is selected, click the button <Next> in Figure 2-14, the interface will
pop up as shown in Figure 2-15.
Figure 2-15 Select BIE Port (Configure Monitor Timeslot by auto calculate mode)
Select the site to be configured monitor timeslot in Figure 2-15.
3) After site is selected, click the button <Site Monitor Timeslot> in Figure 2-15, the
interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-16.
Figure 2-16 Configure Monitor Timeslot (by auto calculate mode)
In Figure 2-16, user can first select one monitor timeslot record, then click <Delete> to
delete it; Or user can first select one monitor timeslot record, then modify it; And user
can click <Add> to add a monitor timeslot record with default value. When modify the
default value of “Site BIE Port No. Connects Monitor Device” and “Abis Timeslot No.
Connects Monitor Device”, user needs only to click the form and select wanted value
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 64/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-15
from the list. When modify the “End Channel No.”, user needs to double click the form
and the interface as shown in Figure 2-17 will pop up.
Figure 2-17 Set End Channel No. (by auto calculate mode)
In Figure 2-17, after user select “End Equipment Type”, “BIE port No.” and “BIE
Timeslot No.”, the system will auto calculate “End Channel No.”. If the user want to
input the value of “End Channel No.” directly, the checkbox “User Input” should be
selected first. Then the edit box will be valid and user can input the wanted value. To
complete configure “End Channel No.”, click <OK> and return to Figure 2-16.
4) After all the monitor timeslot information configuration is completed, click <Next>
as shown in Figure 2-15. In the wizard interface, click <Start Dynamic
Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of monitor timeslot.
V. Verification
Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System” to
check the data table.
Check the following data tables and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to
check the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Semi-permanent connection table], [site BIE trunk mode description table], [site BIE configuration table],
[signaling channel link table], [BSC BIE description table], [BSC BIE active/stby. Group table], [BSC BIE
semi-permanent connection table], [Trunk circuit table]
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 65/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-16
2.7 Modify Abis Bypass Switch
I. Function
This function is used to modify Abis bypass switch. For example, make a BIE port
support or not support Abis bypass.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [BSC/Modify Abis Bypass Switch], the interface will pop up as shown in
Figure 2-18.
Figure 2-18 Select BIE Board (Modify Abis Bypass Switch)
Note:
Only the BIE that has configured sites can be selected in Figure 2-18. Otherwise the button <Next> will
be unusable.
2) After BIE board is selected, click <Next> in Figure 2-18, the interface will pop up as
shown in Figure 2-19.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 66/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-17
Figure 2-19 Modify Bypass Switch (Modify Abis Bypass Switch)
First select BIE port in Figure 2-19, then modify the value of Abis bypass switch with
clicking “Abis Bypass Switch” checkbox.
Note:
1) If the selected BIE port connects no site, the “Abis Bypass Switch” checkbox and the button <Next>
will be unusable.
2) Only one BIE port’s Abis bypass switch can be modified in one dynamic operation.
3) Click <Next> in Figure 2-19, the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-20.
Figure 2-20 Adjust Manually (Modify Abis Bypass Switch)
In Figure 2-20, all sites on the main chain of the newly-added sites are listed. All TRX
properties (e.g., Abis TS No., Abis sub-TS No. and trunk circuit No., etc.), RSL and
OML properties of all sites must be input manually for the manual adjustment of
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 67/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-18
timeslots. If sites cascading is involved, site trunk mode and BIE port property must
also be configured. Detail information on it please refer to adding site of book
“dynamic configuration (BTS)”.
Note:
Figure 2-20 will not appeared only that the selected BIE port is manual mode.
4) After all the configuration is completed, click <Next> shown in Figure 2-13 (or in
Figure 2-12 if the selected BIE port is not manual mode). In the wizard interface, click
<Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of Abis
bypass switch.
IV. Verification
Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System” to
check the data table.
Check the following data tables and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to
check the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Radio channel configuration table], [BSC BIE description table], [site BIE trunk mode description table],
[site BIE configuration table], [signaling channel link table], [site description table], [BSC BIE semi-
permanent connection table], [trunk circuit table], [BSC BIE active/stby. group table]
2.8 Dynamic Configuration without CommandsSome data table can be easily maintained with this function, including maintenance of
trunk circuits, BTS software index, flow control, common parameters, semi-permanent
connection, alarm parameters, GMEM IP address configuration, board software
loading, timer data and TMU auto activation info etc.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 68/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-19
2.8.1 Trunk Circuits
I. Function
This function is used to modify the attributes of trunk circuits on FTC, including the
available state of circuits, and initial CIC, etc.
II. Preparation
1) Be sure that the FTC to be modified has been configured in the initial data
configuration at the BSC Data Auto Configuration System. To meet the demand of
capacity expansion, the configuration of boards such as FTC, BIE and GLAP in BSC
adopts full configuration, and the FTC not in service cannot be deleted in the initial
data configuration.
2) To dynamically modify the circuit properties on FTC such as CIC and circuit type,
make sure that “Auto Calculation” in “A-interface CIC Calculation Mode” has not been
selected. Click [Local Office Information] tab in “BSC Data Auto Configuration
System” of the initial data configuration interface, and then in the tab page click
<Advanced>. You now enter a [Local Data Default Config] interface, where “Auto
Calculation” in “A-interface CIC Calculation Mode” can be found by clicking [A-
Interface Timeslot Occupancy] tab page.). See Figure 2-21.
Figure 2-21 [Local Data Default Config] tab page in initial data configuration
If “Auto Calculation” in “A-interface CIC Calculation Mode” is selected, circuit
properties of any FTC in all the BMs cannot be modified except available state.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 69/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-20
III. Procedure
For example, to connect BSC with MSC, follow the following procedures to modify the
CIC value of No.72 FTC in BM1 as (31, 65535, 32, 33,… 62).
1) Select the [BSC/Dynamic Configuration without Command/Trunk Circuit], the
interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-22.
Figure 2-22 FTC trunk circuit parameters setting
2) Click <Trunk Circuit> in Figure 2-22, then [Select Card] interface listing all FTCs
will pop up. See Figure 2-23.
Figure 2-23 [Select Card] interface listing all FTCs
3) In the wizard interface, select “Module 1” in the [Select the Module Which Card
Lies in] drop-down list then select “72 FTC” in [All Cards in Current Module]. Click
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 70/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-21
<Card Property> or double click the selected FTC, and the [Set FTC Board Property]
interface will pop up. See Figure 2-24.
Figure 2-24 FTC Property Setting
As shown in Figure 2-24, modify the CIC value as (31, 65535, 32, 33, … 62) in the
[Circuit Property] tab page and the "Start CIC No." as 31 in the [Advanced] tab page.
Click <OK> to confirm the settings and return to the interface shown in Figure 2-23.
Then click <OK> to complete the settings.
Note:
1) “Auto-Calculate Circuit Property” in the [Circuit Property] tab page should not be selected if you want
to manually input CIC values in the tab page [Circuit Property]. Otherwise, the text in [Circuit Property]
cannot be edited.
2) The FTC circuit properties will be calculated automatically if the “Auto-Calculate Circuit Property” is
selected. System calculates FTC circuit properties according to A interface timeslot occupancy,
(Whether TS 0, 1, 16 and 31 occupy CIC. If not, whether these TSs should be reserved, etc.),
FTC visibility and circuit availability. For calculation details, refer to Initial data configuration
part. But the value for “Start CIC No.” must be input.
3) All values for circuit properties must be input manually if the “Auto-Calculate Circuit Property” is not
selected. If a TS will not be assigned with any CIC, set the CIC value of this TS as 65535 and no other
values are allowed to be input. The “Start CIC No.” should also be manually input as the minimal
value among the 32 CICs.
4) It must be ensured that “Start CIC No.” of all FTCs are different.
5) The dynamic adding of SS7 is not supported.
4) Repeat Step2) and Step3) to complete the attributes modification of all FTCs.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 71/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-22
5) Click <Next> shown in Figure 2-22 to start the dynamic configuration. In the
dynamic configuration interface, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the
dynamic configuration of modifying trunk circuit properties.
IV. Verification
Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System” to
check the data table.
Check the following data tables and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to
check the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Trunk circuit table], [CIC module table].
2.8.2 BTS Software Index
I. Function
This function is used to dynamically configure BTS software index for BTS software
load.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
For example, to dynamically add BTS 3002C IOMU software index.
1) Select the [BSC/Dynamic Configuration without Command /BTS Software Index],
the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-25.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 72/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-23
Figure 2-25 BTS software index parameters setting
2) Click <BTS Software Index>, [BTS Software Configuration] listing all configured
BTS software indexes will pop up as shown in Figure 2-26.
Figure 2-26 BTS Software Configuration
3) Click <Add> shown in Figure 2-26 to add 3002C IOMU index. [Add Configuration
Item] interface will pop up, as shown in Figure 2-27.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 73/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-24
Figure 2-27 Configuration Item adding
4) Select IOMU_MAIN in the [Software Serial No.] drop-down list box and input
software names and version No. in corresponding fields. Then click <OK> to
finish the adding of 3002C IOMU software index.
Note:
The “Software Version Index No.” as shown in Figure 2-26 is generated by the system, and user needs
not to input..
5) After all the software indexes configuration is completed, click <Next> shown in
Figure 2-25. In the wizard interface, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to
implement the dynamic configuration of adding 3002C IOMU software index to
GMPU.
IV. Verification
1) Run Site Maintenance System and load software to see whether the loading is
successful.
2) Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System”
to check the [Site/Site Software Configuration Table]
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Site Software Configuration Table].
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 74/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-25
2.8.3 Flow Control
I. Function
This function is used to dynamically configure the flow control parameters.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
For example, modify the flow control parameter “Abis Flow Control Counter T1”.
1) Select the [BSC/Dynamic Configuration without Command/Flow Control], theinterface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-28.
Figure 2-28 Flow control parameters setting
2) Click <Flow Control> as shown in Figure 2-28, the password verification window
will pop up. The flow control parameters will be listed in the list box if the password is
correct, See Figure 2-29.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 75/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-26
Figure 2-29 Flow control parameters setting
Modify the value of “Abis Flow Control Counter T1” and click <OK>.
3) Click <Next> shown in Figure 2-28. In the wizard interface, click <Start Dynamic
Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of configuring flow control
parameters to GMPU.
IV. Verification
Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System” to
check the [Configuration/Flow Control Parameter Table] and [Cell/Cell Call Control
Table].
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Flow Control Parameter Table].
2.8.4 Common Parameter
I. Function
This function is used to dynamically configure common parameters, including [Public
Parameter Table], [Module Parameter Table], [Common Max. Tuple Number Table],
[Module Maximum Tuple Table] and [Software Parameter Table].
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 76/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-27
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
For example, modify the “Call Parameter 1” in [Software Parameter Table] as FFFD.
1) Select the [BSC/Dynamic Configuration without Command/Common Parameter],
the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-30.
Figure 2-30 Common parameter setting
2) Click <Common Parameter> as shown in Figure 2-30, the [Common Parameter
Tables] interface will pop up, as shown in Figure 2-31.
Figure 2-31 Common parameter tables setting
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 77/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-28
Select the tab page “Software Parameter Table” in Figure 2-31 and modify the “Call
Parameter 1” as “FFFD”. Click <OK> to complete the modification of all the common
parameters.
3) Click <Next> shown in Figure 2-30. In the wizard interface, click <Start Dynamic
Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of configuring common
parameters to GMPU.
IV. Verification
Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System” to
check the data table.
Check the following data tables and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to
check the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Cell Call Control Table], [Module Parameter Table], [Common Max. Tuple number Table], [Module
Maximum Tuple Table], [Software Parameter Table].
Note:
After modifying the [Software Parameter Table], please check the data of all the BSC modules to see
whether the related data has been set to every module. While other data tables, to see whether the DBF
has been refreshed.
2.8.5 Semi-Permanent Connection
I. Function
This function is used to dynamically configure semi-permanent connection
parameters.
II. Preparation
None.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 78/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-29
III. Procedure
1) Select the [BSC/Dynamic Configuration without Command/Semi-Permanent
Connection], the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-32.
Figure 2-32 Semi-permanent connection parameters setting
2) Click <Semi-Permanent Connection> shown in Figure 2-32, the [Semi-Permanent
Connection Table] interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-33.
Figure 2-33 Semi-permanent connection table setting
To add, modify and delete a record by pressing <Add>, <Modify> and <Delete>
respectively. Click <OK > to complete the configuration of semi-permanent connection.
3) Click <Next> shown in Figure 2-32. In the wizard interface, click <Start Dynamic
Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration to GMPU.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 79/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-30
IV. Verification
Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run "BSC Data Management System” to
check the [Configuration/Semi-permanent Connection Table].
Check the following data table and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to check
the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Semi-permanent Connection Table].
2.8.6 Alarm Parameter
I. Function
This function is used to dynamically configure alarm parameters, including BSC alarm
parameters, BSC alarm environment variables, BTS alarm parameters, BTS alarm
environment variables, AM alarm screening table, BM alarm screening table, alarm
information parameters and AM alarm environment variables.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
For example, to dynamically configure BSC alarm parameters.
1) Select the [BSC/Dynamic Configuration without Command/Alarm/BSC Alarm
Information Configuration], the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-34.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 80/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-31
Figure 2-34 BSC Alarm Information Configuration
2) Click <BSC Alarm Information Configuration> shown in Figure 2-34, the
password verification window will pop up as shown in Figure 2-35.
Figure 2-35 Password verification
After inputting correct password, [Alarm Parameter table] will pop up, as shown in
Figure 2-36. In this interface, alarm parameters will be listed.
Figure 2-36 Alarm parameter table for BSC alarm information configuration
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 81/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-32
Note:
All the alarm parameters are listed in the common interface shown in Figure 2-36, so only one set of
parameters (e.g., AM alarm screening, or BM alarm screening etc.) can be operated by one dynamic
configuration.
3) After all necessary data operations, click <OK> shown in Figure 2-36 to complete
BSC alarm parameter configuration. Click <Next> shown in Figure 2-34 to start
dynamic configuration. In the wizard interface, click <Start Dynamic
Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration to GMPU.
IV. Verification
Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System” to
check the data table.
Check the related data tables and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to check
the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Alarm Parameter Configuration Table], [Alarm Environment Variable Table], [BTS Alarm InformationConfiguration Table], [BTS Alarm Environment Variable Table], [Alarm Information Parameter Table],
[BM Alarm Screening Table], [AM Alarm Screening Table], [AM Alarm Environment Variable Table].
2.8.7 GMEM Configuration
I. Function
This function is used to dynamically configure GMEM IP. One dynamic configuration
can modify the attributes of all the GMEMs installed in BM.
II. Preparation
Be sure that GMEM information has been configured in the initial data configuration
mode at the BSC Data Auto Configuration System. Dynamic adding of GMEM is not
supported in the system.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 82/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-33
III. Procedure
For example, to add the IP information of GMEM numbered as 5 in BM1.
1) Select the [BSC/Dynamic Configuration without Command/Alarm/GMEMConfiguration], the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-37.
Figure 2-37 GMEM Configuration
2) Click <GMEM Configuration> shown in Figure 2-37, The [Select Card] interface
listing all the installed GMEMs will pop up. See Figure 2-38.
Figure 2-38 List of all the installed GMEMs
In the wizard interface, select “Module 1” in the [Select the Module Which Card Lies in]
drop-down list then select the GMEM whose IP address is to be modified in [All Cards
in Current Module]. Click <Card Property> or double click the selected GMEM, and
the [Set GMEM Board Property] interface will pop up. See Figure 2-39.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 83/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-34
Figure 2-39 GMEM IP information
3) Click <Add> to add a GMEM IP configuration item, then click <OK> to return to the
interface shown in Figure 2-38 and then click <OK> to complete the attributes
modification of the GMEM.
4) Repeat Step2) and Step3) to complete the attributes modification of all GMEMs.
5) Click <Next> shown in Figure 2-37 to start the dynamic configuration. In the
dynamic configuration interface, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the
dynamic configuration to GMPU.
IV. Verification
Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System”.
Check the following data tables and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to
check the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[GMEM Configuration Table].
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 84/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-35
2.8.8 Board Software Loading
I. Function
This function is used to configure loading information of board software, e.g. to
configure GMEM loading information.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [BSC/Dynamic Configuration without Command/Board Software
Loading], the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-40.
Figure 2-40 Board software loading
2) Click <Board Software Loading> in the interface shown in Figure 2-40, and the
[Board Software Loading Table] interface will pop up. See Figure 2-41.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 85/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-36
Figure 2-41 Board Software Loading Table
To add, modify or delete a record via <Add>, <Modify> and <Delete> respectively.
Click <OK> to complete the configuration of board software loading information, and
return to the interface shown in Figure 2-40.
3) Click <Next> shown in Figure 2-40 and start the dynamic configuration. In the
wizard interface, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic
configuration to GMPU.
IV. Verification
Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System”.
Check the following data tables and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to
check the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Board Software Loading Table].
2.8.9 Timer Data
I. Function
This function is used to dynamically configure timer data parameters.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 86/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-37
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [BSC/Dynamic Configuration without Command/Timer Data], the
interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-42.
Figure 2-42 Timer Data
2) Click <Timer Data> in the interface shown in Figure 2-42, and the [Timer data]
interface will pop up. See Figure 2-43.
Figure 2-43 Timer Data Table
After all necessary data operations, click <OK> shown in Figure 2-43 to complete
timer data configuration, and return to the interface shown in Figure 2-42.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 87/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-38
3) Click <Next> shown in Figure 2-42 and start the dynamic configuration. In the
wizard interface, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic
configuration to timer data.
IV. Verification
Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System”.
Check the following data tables and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to
check the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Timer Table].
2.8.10 TMU Auto Activation Info
I. Function
This function is used to dynamically configure TMU auto activation info. System will
change one kind of selected parameter of all selected sites into same value.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [BSC/Dynamic Configuration without Command/TMU Auto Activation
Info], the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-44.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 88/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-39
Figure 2-44 Select Site
2) Select sites that need configure TMU auto activation info to activate <Next> in
Figure 2-44. Then click <Next> in Figure 2-44 to enter the interface as shown in
Figure 2-45.
Figure 2-45 Select Site Property
Note:
Only TMU auto activation info parameters (e.g. auto activation switch, TMU major version number, TMU
minor version number and version time) can be selected in Figure 2-45. Otherwise a message will be
shown in Figure 2-46.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 89/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-40
Figure 2-46 Error message if selected parameters is not related to TMU auto activation info
3) Then click <Next> in Figure 2-45 to enter the interface as shown in Figure 2-47.
Figure 2-47 Modify Site Property
Click <Modify Site Property> in Figure 2-47 to modify property of selected TMU auto
activation info. The interface is shown in Figure 2-48.
Figure 2-48 Modify TMU Auto Activation Info
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 90/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-41
Note:
Only selected parameters can be edited in Figure 2-48.
After all necessary data operations, click <OK> shown in Figure 2-48 to complete
TMU auto activation info configuration, and return to the interface shown in
Figure 2-47.
4) Then click <Next> in Figure 2-47 to enter the interface as shown in Figure 2-49.
Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration to TMU
auto activation info.
Figure 2-49 Dynamic configuration
IV. Verification
Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System”.
Check the following data tables and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to
check the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Site Description Table].
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 91/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-42
2.9 Import Network Parameters
I. Function
This function is used to import network parameters, including: frequencies of cells,
external cells and adjacent relationship of cells. The network parameters information
that will be imported is saved in external text files which can only be edited by
Microsoft Excel.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [BSC/Import Network Parameters], the interface will pop up as shown in
Figure 2-50.
Figure 2-50 Select imported text file (Import Network Parameters)
2) Select text that is used to import operation, then click <Open> in Figure 2-50 to
enter the interface as shown in Figure 2-51. Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to
implement the dynamic configuration to importing network parameters.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 92/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-43
Figure 2-51 Dynamic Configuration (Import Network Parameters)
Note:
1) System will perform different dynamic configuration (frequencies of cells import, external cells import
or adjacent relationship of cells import according to different type of the selected text file.
2) Error information will be given if the selected text file contains incorrect information.
IV. Verification
Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System”.
Check the following data tables and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] to
check the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.
2.10 Export Network Parameters
I. Function
This function is used to export network parameters, including frequencies of cells,
external cells and adjacent relationship of cells. The network parameters information
that has been exported is saved in external text files which can only be edited by
Microsoft Excel.
II. Preparation
None.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 93/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-44
III. Procedure
1) Select the [BSC/export Network Parameters], the interface will pop up as shown in
Figure 2-52.
Figure 2-52 Export Network Parameters
First select export network parameter type (export frequencies of cells, export
external cells or export adjacent relationship of cells), then select cells or external
cells that want to perform exporting in Figure 2-52, the button <Export Parameter> willbe usable.
2) Click <Export Parameter> in Figure 2-52 to enter the interface as shown in
Figure 2-53.
Figure 2-53 Select Output File Name (Export Network Parameters)
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 94/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-45
First input file name, then click <Save> in Figure 2-53, Information represents that
exporting operation is end will be shown in Figure 2-54.
Figure 2-54 Export Successfully
3) After exporting all types of network parameters, click <Exit> in Figure 2-52 to
complete exporting operation.
IV. Verification
Check the correctness of all the exported text files.
Note:
No modification of any data table is related to this operation.
2.11 Modify Reserved Parameters
I. Function
The parameters are reserved for functions that will be developed later or software
patch. There are different reserved parameters in numbers for BM, site, cell or TRX
that have been configured, not configured BM, site, cell or TRX has no reserved
parameters. This operation is to modify these exist reserved parameters, can not to
add or delete.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [BSC/Modify Reserved Parameters], if select Module, Site or Cell in the
submenu, the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-55.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 95/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-46
Figure 2-55 select object to be modified(Module, Site or Cell)
If select TRX in the submenu, the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 2-56.
Figure 2-56 select object to be modified(Module, Site or Cell)
According to the reserved parameters that will be modified, select module, site, cell or
TRX in Figure 2-55 or Figure 2-56, then the button <Next> will be usable.
2) Click <Next> in Figure 2-55 or Figure 2-56, the interface will pop up as shown in
Figure 2-57
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 96/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-47
Figure 2-57 reselect object to be modified(Module, Site, Cell or TRX)
In Figure 2-57, user can not only select one object from the selected module, site, cell
or TRX in previous step to modify, but also select several or all objects to modify
together.
3) Then click <Modify Reserved Parameters> in Figure 2-57, the interface will pop up
as shown in Figure 2-58, there will be some litter different in the interface according touser select module, site, cell or TRX in first step.
Figure 2-58 modify reserved parameters
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 97/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 2 Configure BSC Data
2-48
In Figure 2-58, if user want to modify one parameter a time, click the cell that the
parameter located in and input directly. If user want to modify several parameters in
one column a time, follow the steps: First, modify any one parameter of them. Second,
right click the parameter. Third, select “Current col from current row” or “Current col.from begin”
4) After modify all reserved parameters, click <Next> as shown in Figure 2-57 and
start the dynamic configuration. In the wizard interface, click <Start Dynamic
Configuration> to implement modify reserved parameters operation.
IV. Verification
Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run “BSC Data Management System”.
Check the following data tables and select the [Operations/View Host Data…] tocheck the host data to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[BM Reserved Parameter Table], [Site Reserved Parameter Table], [Cell Reserved Parameter Table],
[TRX Reserved Parameter Table].
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 98/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-1
Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
This chapter introduces operations to BTS data. Including: adding/deleting site,
adding/deleting TRX, adding/deleting BTS board, modify site's extended parameter,
modify site's output property, start-up traffic statistic task re-register.
3.1 Add a Site
I. Function
This function is used to add a site online. There is no need to reset BSC.
Caution:
1) Under chain and tree networking, if the new site fails to normally operate, it is recommended that sites
on the chain where this site can be located be reset successively from the one at the uppermost level. In
addition, BIE can also be reset. Check the correctness of the data configuration.
2) After successfully adding a site, re-register the traffic statistics tasks of this site by selecting the
[BTS/Startup Traffic Stat. Task Re-register].
3) If the new site is the first added site of BIE port , and the newly added site can not work, needs to
reset the BIE.
II. Preparation
1) Make sure that there are idle E1 ports on BIE.
2) Add a site involves most of the BSC data. Before dynamic configuration, do checkthe data configuration carefully to avoid data inconsistency or data error.
3) Only one site can be added to one BIE port by one dynamic configuration
operation. If the TRX of the new site is distributed over multiple chains, Add TRX or
Add Cell operation should be performed after the site is successfully added.
4) Dynamic adding or deleting of subsidiary chain is not supported in the system.
Usually configuration of multi-chain should have been completed in the initial
configuration.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 99/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-2
5) The “adding a cell” operation has been performed during the process of the “Add a
Site” operation. Select the [Cell/ Modify Cell Handover Parameter] to implement
"Modify Cell Handover Parameter" operation to configure cell adjacency relationship
after the dynamic adding of site succeeds.
III. Procedure
For example, add Site30, TRX0, TRX3, TRX5, TRX8, TRX18, TRX21 and TRX24 in
BM1 for two cells. Cell1 includes TRX0, TRX5, TRX18 and TRX24 and Cell2 includes
TRX3, TRX8 and TRX21. Cell1 and Cell2 are bi-directionally adjacent. No TS manual
adjustment is required for the new site. And the new site is connected to port0 of BIE0,
with trunk mode as 12:1.
1) Select the [BTS/Add a Site], the [Add a Site] interface will pop up. Select the
module of the BTS and the BIE in it as shown in Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-1 Selecting the board and the module containing the board in [Add a Site]
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-2 Add a site
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 100/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-3
Caution:
The trunk mode can not be modified unless no sites have been connected to the any port of BIE board.
3) Select Port [0] the BIE port connected to the BTS, and Site0 the site of upper level
to add site. Then click <Add Site> to enter the interface shown in Figure 3-3.
Figure 3-3 Add site
Having chosen the site type BTS 30, BIE port of upper level, click <OK> to close the
window of "Add site". The interface will pop up, as shown in Figure 3-4 will pop up.
Figure 3-4 Select mode
Click <No> to complete the “Adding Site”.
Caution:
1) In Figure 3-4, if click <Yes>, A [Manual Mode] check box will appear in the [Add a Site] interface as
shown in Figure 3-15, in which “Site2” will also appear. Select this parameter and for more details,
please refer the following steps, i.e., Step13) ~ Step19).
2) After a site is added, the button <Add Site>, the [Trunk Mode] list box and all the BIE ports in
Figure 3-2 can not be edited to ensure that one dynamic operation can only add one site to one BIE port.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 101/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-4
In Figure 3-2, select <Site Ports Table> and click <OK>. A new interface will appear
as shown in Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-5 Configuration of cascading relations between sites
Caution:
1) <Modify BIE Port and Site Connection> is usable, only if the selected BIE port is the one that the
subsidiary chain is connected to.
2) The connection between the upper level site and the lower site with inlet port No. as 0 cannot be
deleted, and the port with lower site inlet port number as 0 cannot be modified.
Click <OK> to return to the [Add Site] interface. Then click <OK> and a [Confirm]
interface will pop up. If to adjust BIE port manually, please click <Yes> in the [Confirm]
interface and go to Step 13.
4) In Figure 3-2, click <Next>, the interface will appear as shown in Figure 3-6.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 102/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-5
Figure 3-6 Add TRX
Click <Add TRX> to add No.0, 3, 5, 8, 18, 21 and 24 TRX.
5) After adding TRX, click <Next>, the interface will appear as shown in Figure 3-7.
Figure 3-7 Adding cell in [Add a Site]
6) If the newly added TRXs are borne by multiple cabinets, click <Modify Site Device’sProperty> shown in Figure 3-7 to configure the intra-site cascading relationship and
delete the excessive boards in the site. See Figure 3-8.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 103/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-6
Figure 3-8 BTS equipment property configuration
Select the rack in the [Current Rack] drop-down list box, delete the excessive boards,
and double click the CDU to configure antenna feeder property. Then click <BTS
Property> to configure site property.
Click <Inter-Site Link> shown in Figure 3-8 to configure the intra-site cascading. See
Figure 3-9.
Figure 3-9 Site internal connections configuration
Configure the site internal connections according to the actual demand. The relations
between port No. and TRX are shown in Table 3-1.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 104/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-7
Table 3-1 Relationship between port No. and TRX
Cabinet group No. Port No. No. of TRX corresponding to BTS30No. of TRX corresponding to
BTS312
0 0~7 0~17 0~23
1 8~11 18~35 24~47
2 12~15 36~53 48~71
7) Click <Add Cell> as shown in Figure 3-7 to add 2 cells. See Figure 3-10.
Figure 3-10 Add cell
Note:
1) The “Cell Name” cannot be edited when the value of [Cell Number] exceeds 1 or the “Name cell by
site’s name” is selected.
2) If the “Name cell by site’s name” is selected, the cell name format is “Site name-cell No.”, e.g., the 2
cells added in this example should be named as “Site2-1” and “Site2-2”.
3) If the value in [Cell Number] exceeds 1 and the checkbox “Name cell by site’s name” is not selected,
the cell name format is “Cell” + “Cell No.”, e.g.
8) In Figure 3-10, click <OK>, the two cells added will be listed in the box as shown in
Figure 3-11.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 105/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-8
Figure 3-11 Add a site (add cells)
9) Add TRX for the new cells. Click <Modify Cell Property> in Figure 3-11 and the
interface will pop up as shown in Figure 3-12.
Figure 3-12 Set cell property
As shown in Figure 3-12, assign No.0, 5, 18 and 24 TRX as well as properties such
as usable frequency and network parameters to Site2-1. For more details about
advance property configuration of the cell, please refer to 4.1 Add a cell in Chapter 4.
Note:
In Figure 3-11, select the cell and click <Delete Cell> to delete it.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 106/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-9
10) The procedure of adding TRXs to Site2-2 is the same as that to Site2-1 described
above.
11) After configured all cell data and make sure that all TRX are assigned to cell, click
<Modify Reserved Parameters> in Figure 3-11 to modify the reserved parameters of
newly added site, cell and TRX, the interface as shown in Figure 3-13 will pop up.
Figure 3-13 Modify reserved parameters
If not modify the reserved parameters, they have default value: 65535.
12) Click <Next> shown in Figure 3-11 after completing the data configuration of site
and cell. The dynamic configuration will begin from this step. See Figure 3-14.
Figure 3-14 Add a site (dynamic configuration)
In Figure 3-14, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic setting
to GMPU.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 107/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-10
Note:
One dynamic configuration can only modify the physical link No. and the signaling connection No. of
LAPD of the local sites under local BIE port.
13) After adding sites successfully, Select the [Cell/Modify Cell’s Handover Parameter]
to configure the adjacent relationship for the two cells. Now the configuration of
adding a site without the TS manual adjustment is finished.
14) The following procedures will introduce how to manually adjust timeslots. In
Figure 3-3, click <OK>, a [Confirm] interface shown in Figure 3-4 will pop up.
Note:
To manually adjust timeslot, please refer to “7.4 TS manual adjustment” in M900/M1800 Base Station
Controller Data Configuration Manual - Initial Configuration.
If click <Yes> in the [Confirm] interface as shown Figure 3-4 in Step3). A [Manual
Mode] check box will appear in the [Add a Site] interface, as shown in Figure 3-15.
Check the [Manual Mode] check box.
Figure 3-15 Check [Manual Mode]
15) After “Adding Cell” described in Step 4) ~ Step 10), the TS manual adjustment
interface will pop up. See Figure 3-16.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 108/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-11
Figure 3-16 Timeslot manual adjustment interface
In Figure 3-16, all sites on the main chain of the newly-added sites are listed. All TRX
properties (e.g., Abis TS No., Abis sub-TS No. and trunk circuit No., etc.), RSL and
OML properties of the new sites must be input manually for the manual adjustment of
timeslots. If sites cascading is involved, site trunk mode and BIE port property must
also be configured.
16) In Figure 3-16, select the new site and click <TRX Property>, the [TRX Property]
interface will pop up. See Figure 3-17.
Figure 3-17 TRX Property
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 109/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-12
Note:
1) The properties listed in Figure 3-17 have default values before they are modified, e.g., the Abis TS
No. and Abis Sub-TS No. are 0, the Trunk circuit No. is 65535 and the BSC BIE E1 TimeSlot No. is 255.
2) One dynamic configuration can only modify the TRX properties of the new site, and view but not
modify the TRX properties of other sites.
3) Under TS manual adjustment mode, the physical links of RSL and OML should not be modified and
they are automatically calculated by system.
4) RSLs are multiplexed according to Abis TS No. input by the user, so data must be correct under TS
manual adjustment mode.
5) When the value in “Idle Timeslot Number” in Figure 3-17 exceeds 0, <Idle Timeslot> in Figure 3-16
will be usable. Click the button to view the idle timeslot distribution of the selected site.
6) Rev. OML Trunk Circuit No. and Rev. OML ABIS TS No. and Rev. OML BSC BIE
E1 TS No. are usable if relay mode of BIE board is full rate ring topology or half rate
ring topology.
17) Modify the RSL properties of all the new TRXs. Double click the row of the TRX
whose RSL properties are to be modified in Figure 3-17, the [RSL Property] interface
will pop up. See Figure 3-18.
Figure 3-18 RSL property configuration
18) If the new site is the cascaded site, the BIE trunk mode should be configured.Click <Site Trunk Mode Description> in Figure 3-16 and the [Site Trunk Mode]
interface will pop up. See Figure 3-19.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 110/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-13
Figure 3-19 Site trunk mode configuration
Reference:
[Site Frame Description Table] in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data
Configuration Reference – Engineering Parameters
Note:
1) “Trunk Mode No.” in Figure 3-19 should be the upper site number multiply two.
2) If relay mode of BIE board is full rate ring topology or half rate ring topology , the Rev.
Trunk Mode No. should be the upper site number multiply two plus one.
3) The BIE trunk modes of all the sites connected to all the BIE ports are listed in Figure 3-19.
19) Click <BIE Port Property> in Figure 3-16 and the [BSC BIE Description Data]
interface will pop up. See Figure 3-20.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 111/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-14
Figure 3-20 BSC BIE description data configuration
Reference:
[Frame Description Table] in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data Configuration
Reference – Engineering Parameters.
20) Modify the Abis interface and BS interface properties of BSC BIE ports according
to the actual demand. After modifying the trunk data of BIE, plug out and plug in the
BIE to enable the data.
21) By now timeslot manual adjustment is finished. Click <Next> in Figure 3-16 and
the dynamic configuration interface will pop up. In the wizard interface, click <Start
Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic setting of adding a site to GMPU.
IV. Verification
1) After the node icons of the newly added site are displayed on the OMC SHELL,
start the Site Maintenance System of the newly added site. If all carriers are powered
on and in normal condition, all channels in a cell will be in idle status.
2) Calls made in newly added sites can be established.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 112/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-15
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[HWII power control table], [BSC Cell table], [TRX configuration table], [Radio channel config. table],
[LAPD semi-perm. connection table], [LAPD signaling connection table], [BSC BIE active/stby. group
table], [BSC BIE description table], [Site BIE trunk mode descr. table], [Site BIE configuration table],
[Signaling channel link table], [System information table], [Cell configuration table], [Normal handover
table], [Cell Allocation table], [BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table], [Cell attribute table], [Cell alarm
threshold table], [Cell call control table], [Cell call control para. table], [Cell module information table],
[Handover control table], [GSM0508 handover table], [Load handover table], [Intra-cell cont. HO ctrl.
table], [Penalty table], [Filter table], [Emergency handover table], [Adjacent Cell Relation table], [Power
control selection table], [Ordinary cell power control table], [BTS power control table], [MS power control
table], [Radio CH management ctrl. table], [Site description table], [Site slot description table], [Carrier
configuration table], [External cell description table], [Fast-moving handover table], [Cell module
information table], [Frequency hopping table], [Site frame description table], [HW II channel allocation
table], [Antenna and feeder config. table], [Concentric cell handover table], [Site Software Configuration
table], [Site Reserved Parameter Table] , [Cell Reserved Parameter Table] , [TRX Reserved Parameter
Table].
3.2 Delete a Site
I. Function
This function is used to delete sites no longer needed. When sites are deleted, all the
cells connected to them will also be deleted.
Caution:
After deleting a site, the corresponding icon on the OMC Shell operation interface should be deleted.
II. Preparation
1) Before site deletion, block all cells through Site Maintenance System. This can
avoid conversations remaining in the site during deletion.
2) Only one site can be deleted each time. If the site to be deleted contains sub-sites
cascaded, the sub-sites cascaded must first be deleted.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 113/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-16
3) If the site to be deleted is not the first level site connected to BIE port and BIE port
is in the timeslot manual adjustment mode, the BIE trunk mode of the site must be
modified manually by implementing TS manual adjustment operation.
III. Procedure
For example, to dynamically delete Site2 in BM1 (the BIE port of Site2 is in the TS
manual adjustment mode and Site2 is the sub-site of Site0.
1) Select the [BTS/Delete a Site], the [Delete a Site] interface will pop up. Select Site2
to be deleted in it as shown in Figure 3-21.
Figure 3-21 Delete a site - select site
Note:
If no site is selected or the site selected is not the last level site, <Next> in Figure 3-21 will be unusable.
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 3-22.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 114/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-17
Figure 3-22 Delete site (timeslot manual adjustment)
Note:
1) If the BIE port connected to the selected site is not in TS manual adjustment mode, the dynamic
configuration interface instead of timeslot manual adjustment interface will pop up.
2) All the sites connected to the BIE port of the site, (Site2 in BM1) to be deleted will be listed in the list
box. If the connection is in multi-chain mode, all the sites of the main chain BIE port will be listed.
However, the site to be deleted will not be listed.
3) The button <Idle Timeslot> is usable, if the idle timeslot of the selected site is not 0.
Select the last site in the list box, click <Site trunk mode description> in Figure 3-22 to
manually modify the site BIE trunk mode. See Figure 3-23.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 115/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-18
Figure 3-23 Delete site (site BIE trunk mode)
Reference:
[Site Frame Description Table] in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data
Configuration Reference – Engineering Parameters.
Site BIE Trunk Mode Description of Site2 can be deleted manually, i.e., all the records
of the site with “Trunk Mode No.” as 0 can be deleted by pressing <Delete>.
In Figure 3-22, click <TRX Property> to view the site TRX property. See Figure 3-24.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 116/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-19
Figure 3-24 Delete site (site TRX property)
The TRX properties of Site0 are listed in Figure 3-24.
Caution:
Any parameter, such as Abis TS No. and Abis Sub-TS No., is not advised to be modified.
3) After TS manual adjustment, click <Next> in Figure 3-22. Then click <Start
Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic setting of deleting a site to GMPU.
See Figure 3-25.
Figure 3-25 Command list for dynamic setting
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 117/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-20
Note:
Because there are many adjacent cells for any cell under a site, and the adjacent relationship between
the cells will be deleted after a BTS has been deleted. Therefore, the "configure handover data"
command must be executed to automatically update the adjacent relationship for the cells adjacent to
the deleted cell.
IV. Verification
Maintenance for sites deleted is not available on OMC SHELL. The system prompts
error site number. OMLs and RSLs corresponding to the sites have already been
released in switching network boards.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[HWII power control table], [BSC Cell table], [TRX configuration table], [Radio channel config. table],
[LAPD semi-perm. connection table], [LAPD signaling connection table], [BSC BIE active/stby. group
table], [BSC BIE description table], [Site BIE trunk mode descr. table], [Site BIE configuration table],
[Signaling channel link table], [System information table], [Cell configuration table], [Normal handover
table], [Cell Allocation table], [BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table], [Cell attribute table], [Cell alarm
threshold table], [Cell call control table], [Cell call control para. table], [Cell module information table],
[Handover control table], [GSM0508 handover table], [Load handover table], [Intra-cell cont. HO ctrl.
table], [Penalty table], [Filter table], [Emergency handover table], [Adjacent Cell Relation table], [Power
control selection table], [Ordinary cell power control table], [BTS power control table], [MS power control
table], [Radio CH management ctrl. table], [Site description table], [Site slot description table], [Carrier
configuration table], [External cell description table], [Fast-moving handover table], [Cell module
information table], [Frequency hopping table], [Site frame description table], [HW II channel allocation
table], [Antenna and feeder config. table], [Concentric cell handover table], [Site Software Configuration
table] , [Site Reserved Parameter Table] , [Cell Reserved Parameter Table] , [TRX Reserved Parameter
Table].
3.3 Add TRX
I. Function
This function is used to add carrier to the designated site. Usually used for cell
capacity expansion.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 118/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-21
Caution:
1) In the case of star and tree networking, if the new TRX or other equipment fails to operate, It is
recommended that BTSs on the link where this site can be located be reset successively from the one at
the uppermost level. In addition, BIE can also be reset. Check the correctness of the data configuration.
2) After successfully adding a TRX, the traffic statistics tasks of this site should be re-registered.
II. Preparation
1) Before adding the TRX, block the TRX from Site Maintenance System.
2) Dynamic adding or deleting of subsidiary chain is not supported in the system.Usually configuration of multi-chain should have been completed in the initial
configuration.
3) TRX can only be added to one site connected to one BIE port by one dynamic
configuration. To add multiple TRXs to multiple sites or to multiple BIE ports of one
site, please first perform "Add TRX" operation to one site connected to one BIE port,
then repeat the operation.
4) If the BIE port of the site to be added with TRX is in the TS manual adjustment
mode, perform timeslot manual adjustment operation to adjust the frequency
information of the site.
III. Procedure
For example, to add No.1 and No. 7 TRX to Site0-1 and Site0-2 under Site0 in BM1.
The BIE port corresponding to Site0 is in the timeslot manual adjustment mode.
1) Select the [BTS/Add TRX], the [Add TRX] interface will pop up. Select “Site0” in
BM1 as shown in Figure 3-26.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 119/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-22
Figure 3-26 Select site
Note:
The button <Next> in Figure 3-26 is unusable, if no site is selected.
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 3-27.
Figure 3-27 Add TRX
Note:
All the BIEs and BIE ports connected to the site are respectively listed in the [BIE the Site Belongs to]
drop-down box, and [Select]. Select the BIE and BIE port bearing the new TRX. However [BIE the Site
Belongs to], and [Select] are not available if there is TRX in the” Installed TRX” list, so that TRX can only
be added to one port of one BIE for each operation.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 120/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-23
3) After the TRX is added, click <Next> in Figure 3-27 to assign the new TRX to cells.
See Figure 3-28.
Figure 3-28 Configure cell
Note:
1) It is not allowed to add or delete the existed cells at this step. To add or delete a cell, select the
[Cell/Add Cell] or [Cell/Delete Cell].
2) If the internal transparent transmission relationship gets changed because of the new TRXs, e.g., for
BTS30, there have been only TRX1 and TRX4, but now TRX18 is added to it, click <Modify Site
Property> to configure the site internal connections. For more details of site internal connection
configuration, refer to 3.1 Add a Site.
Select a cell in [Cell List] then click <Set Cell Property> to configure the cell property
for the cells in list. See Figure 3-29.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 121/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-24
Figure 3-29 Assign TRX to cell
Use “Modify CA”, user can add frequency to the Cell.
Assign No.1 TRX to Site0-1, then double click “1 TRX” listed in the "Assigned TRX"
box, and the “TRX Property [No.1 TRX]” interface will pop up, user can assign
frequency for No.1 TRX.
Assign No.7 TRX and assign available frequencies to Site0-2 according to the steps
described above.
After assign all TRX to cell, click the button <Modify Reserved Parameters> in
Figure 3-28 to modify newly added TRX’s reserved parameters, otherwise these
parameters have default value: 65535.
If there is no TRX assigned to the cell, the button <Next> in Figure 3-28 is unusable.
4) Click <Next> in Figure 3-28, the timeslot manual adjustment interface will pop up.
See Figure 3-30.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 122/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-25
Figure 3-30 Timeslot manual adjustment
Select the newly-added site in the list box, and then respectively click <TRX
Property>, <Site Trunk Mode Description>, <BIE Port Property> to configure related
properties.
Caution:
In the ”TRX property” interface after clicking <TRX Property> as shown in Figure 3-30, only the TRX
properties of the BIE port and the site can be modified and the properties of other BIE ports or sites
cannot be modified. This principle is applicable to all dynamic configuration operations.
Note:
1) If the BIE port of the BIE bearing the TRX added is not in the TS manual adjustment mode, enter the
dynamic configuration interface as described in 3.1 Add a Site.
2) For more details of TS manual adjustment, please refer to 3.1 Add a Site.
5) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic setting of adding
TRX to GMPU.
IV. Verification
1) Check through the Site Maintenance System to see if the TRX added is in normal
status.
2) Test the conversation via the new TRX with test MS.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 123/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-26
3) Check the data tables and the host to see whether the related data has been
correctly modified.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Site BIE configuration table], [Site slot description table], [Site description table], [Antenna and feeder
config. table], [Site frame description table], [TRX configuration table], [Carrier configuration table],
[Radio channel config. table], [LAPD semi-perm. connection table], [LAPD signaling connection table],
[Signaling channel link table], [Frequency hopping table], [Cell attribute table], [BA1(BCCH) table],
[BA2(SACCH) table], [Site BIE trunk mode descr. table], [BSC BIE description table] , [TRX Reserved
Parameter Table].
3.4 Delete TRX
I. Function
This function is used to delete a faulty carrier of a BTS, or to adjust the capacity of the
cells within the same site.
Caution:
1) In the case of star and tree networking, if system fails to operate normally, it is recommended that
BTSs on the link where this site can be located be reset successively from the one at the uppermost
level. In addition, BIE can also be reset. Check the correctness of the data configuration at the same
time.
2) After successfully deleting a TRX, the traffic statistics tasks of this site should be re-registered. (Menu:
[BTS/Startup Traffic Stat. Task Re-register])
II. Preparation
1) Block the TRX at the Site Maintenance System before deleting it in case there is
still ongoing session on the TRX.
2) To delete the TRX configured with main BCCH of the cell, first select the
[Cell/Modify TRX’s Channel Type] to modify the channel type as non-main BCCH and
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 124/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-27
assign a new BCCH to the cell. If the main BCCH is the last one in the cell, select the
[Cell/Delete Cell] to delete the cell.
3) Only TRXs (except the TRX configured with main BCCH) of one cell in one site can
be deleted for one deletion. To delete TRXs in different sites or to delete TRXs of
different cells in the same site, select [BTS/Delete TRX] to delete the TRX repeatedly.
4) For BTS20, the corresponding FPU will also be deleted when TRX is deleted. For
BTS3002C-204, the corresponding MFU will also be deleted when TRX is deleted.
5) After the TRX is deleted, the rack will be deleted except for rack0 if there is no TRX
on it.
6) If the BIE port of the site in which TRX is to be deleted is in timeslot manual
adjustment mode, timeslot should be adjusted manually when deleting TRX. For more
details of timeslot manual adjustment, refer to 3.1 Add a Site or 3.3 Add TRX.
III. Procedure
To delete No.18 and No.20 TRXs of Site2 in BM1. The two TRXs are assigned to
Site2-1 which contains 3 TRXs, No.0, No.18 and No.24 TRXs.
1) Select the [BTS/Delete TRX], the [Delete TRX] interface will pop up. Select “Site2-
1” of the TRX to be deleted in it as shown in Figure 3-31.
Figure 3-31 Select cell
Note:
The button <Next> in Figure 3-31 is unusable, if no cell is selected.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 125/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-28
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 3-32.
Figure 3-32 Select TRX
3) Select No.18 and No. 24 TRXs to be deleted to the “Delete TRX” list box, then click
<Next> to continue.
Note:
It is not allowed to delete the main BCCH of the cell. Otherwise, the prompt as shown in Figure 3-33 will
pop up.
Figure 3-33 Prompt box indicating the TRX where the main BCCH is located cannot be deleted
4) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic setting of deleting
TRX to GMPU.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 126/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-29
Note:
If the BIE port of the site in which TRX is to be deleted is in TS manual adjustment mode, timeslot should
be adjusted manually when TRX is deleted. For more details of timeslot manual adjustment, refer to 3.1
Add a Site or 3.3 Add TRX.
IV. Verification
Check to see if the designated TRXs have been deleted.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Site BIE configuration table], [Site slot description table], [Site description table], [Antenna and feeder
config. table], [Site frame description table], [TRX configuration table], [Carrier configuration table],
[Radio channel config. table], [LAPD semi-perm. connection table], [LAPD signaling connection table],
[Signaling channel link table], [Frequency hopping table], [Cell attribute table], [BA1(BCCH) table],
[BA2(SACCH) table], [Site BIE trunk mode descr. table], [BSC BIE description table] , [TRX Reserved
Parameter Table].
3.5 Add or Delete Board
I. Function
This operation is used to standby TMU, PSU, PMU, EAC, PBU, CDU, EDU, TES,
TEU, OMU, MCK and HPA.
Caution:
1) It is not allowed to delete the active TMU/TRX/FPU/MFU/MMU.
2) FPU in BTS20 and MFU in BTS3001C cannot be separately deleted. Only when the TRX is deleted,
these boards will also be deleted.
3) Site output property and extended parameter will be adjusted as the default value when EAC is
deleted. For more details, please refer to 3.7 Modify Site and 3.8 Modify Site's Output Property.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 127/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-30
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [BTS/Add or Delete Board], the [Add or Delete Board] interface will pop
up. Select the site for which the board will be added/deleted as shown in Figure 3-34.
Figure 3-34 Select site
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 3-35.
Figure 3-35 Add/delete board
3) Click <Add/Delete BTS Board> to add/delete the board in the BTS hardware
configuration panel. See Figure 3-36.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 128/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-31
Figure 3-36 Configure sites device’s property
On the site device’s panel, select the board to be deleted, then press <Delete> from
the keyboard to delete the board. Or, select and right click the board, then select the
[Add] or [Delete] in the pop-up floating menu to add or delete the board.
Note:
TRX cannot be deleted in this operation.
4) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic setting of
adding/deleting BTS board to GMPU.
Figure 3-37 Add or delete board
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 129/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-32
IV. Verification
Board status is normal when viewed from the Site Maintenance System.
Check the data tables and the host to see whether the related data has been correctlymodified.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Site frame description table], [Site slot description table], [Antenna and feeder config. table], [Site
description table].
3.6 Modify Board Type
I. Function
This operation is used to online modify CDU, EDU, TRX, PBU card type.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [BTS/Modify Board Type], the [Modify Board Type] interface will pop up.
Select the site for which the board type will be modified as shown in Figure 3-38.
Figure 3-38 Select Site (Modify Site Board Type)
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 130/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-33
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 3-39.
Figure 3-39 Modify Board Type (Modify Site Board Type)
Click <Modify BTS Board Type>, the interface will be shown in Figure 3-40.
Figure 3-40 Site Device’s Property
Click <Modify BTS Board Type> to enter the interface shown in Figure 3-47.
3) To modify PBU board type, double click PBU card to enter the interface of PBU
property as shown in Figure 3-41.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 131/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-34
Figure 3-41 Set PBU Board Property
4) To modify CDU board type, double click CDU card to enter the interface of CDU
property as shown in Figure 3-42.
Figure 3-42 Set CDU Board property
5) To modify EDU board type, double click EDU card to enter the interface of EDU
property as shown in Figure 3-43.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 132/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-35
Figure 3-43 Set REDU Board Property
6) To modify TRX board type, double click TRX card to enter the interface of TRX
property as shown in Figure 3-44.
Figure 3-44 Set TRX Board Type
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 133/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-36
Note:
There is a restriction on TRX card type and TRX frequency .Frequency of PTRX must within 1-124.
Frequency of ETRX must within 0-124 or 975-1023. Frequency of RTRX must within 0-124 or 955-1023.
Frequency of DTRX must within 512-885.
Click <complete> in Figure 3-40 to finish modification.
7) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement dynamic setting of modifying
Site board type. See Figure 3-48.
IV. Verification
Check the data tables to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Site Slot Description Table].
3.7 Modify Site Data
I. Function
This operation is used to online modify the clock mode, clock parameter and
transmission mode of the site. If the transmission mode is modified, 4th level reset
command will be sent from BSC Data Auto Configuration System.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [BTS/Modify Site's Extended Parameter], the [Modify Site's Extended
Parameter] interface will pop up. Select the site for which the clock parameters will be
modified as shown in Figure 3-45.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 134/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-37
Figure 3-45 Select site
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 3-46.
Figure 3-46 Modify clock parameter
3) Click <Modify Site’s Ext Parameter> to enter the interface shown in Figure 3-47.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 135/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-38
Figure 3-47 Modify equipment property of a site
Reference:
[Site Description Table] in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data Configuration
Reference – Engineering Parameters.
In Figure 3-47, modify site’s parameter and click <OK> to complete the modification.
4) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement dynamic setting of modifying site
clock parameters to GMPU. See Figure 3-48.
Figure 3-48 Command list for dynamic configuration
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 136/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-39
IV. Verification
The clock parameter is correctly modified when viewed from the Site Maintenance
System.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Site Description Table].
3.8 Modify Site's Output Property
I. Function
This operation is used to online modify the EAC relay status of the site. This operation
can only be implemented to the site configured with EACs.
II. Preparation
Make sure that the site whose output properties are to be modified has been
configured with EAC. If no EAC is configured to the site, select the [BTS/Add or Delete Board] described in 3.5 Add or Delete Board to add an EAC.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [BTS/Modify Site's Output Property], the [Modify Site's Output Property]
interface will pop up. Select the site for which the output property is to be modified as
shown in Figure 3-49.
Figure 3-49 Select site
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 137/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-40
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 3-50.
Figure 3-50 Modify site output parameter
3) Click <Modify Site Output> to modify EAC relay status.
4) After modifying EAC relay status, click <Next> in Figure 3-50 to continue. In the
dynamic configuration interface, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the
dynamic setting of modifying site output property to GMPU.
IV. Verification
Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run BSC Data Management System tocheck the [Site/Site Description Table]
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Site Description Table].
3.9 Startup Traffic Stat. Task Re-register
I. Function
This operation is used to start up traffic statistics task re-registration online. This
function is usually used to renew the permanent traffic statistics task. It is usually
used for some critical operations that impacts cell handover relationship, e.g., to
dynamically add/delete a site, add/delete TRX, add/delete a cell, modify cell
adjacency relationship and modify CGI etc.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 138/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-41
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [BTS/Startup Traffic Stat. Task Re-register], the [Startup Traffic Stat. Task
Re-register] interface will pop up. Select startup mode in it as shown in Figure 3-51.
Figure 3-51 Startup traffic statistics task re-register
2) Click <Next> to continue.
3) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic setting of starting
up traffic statistics task re-registration to GMPU. See Figure 3-52.
Figure 3-52 Command list during dynamic setting
Note:
No modification of any data table is related to this operation.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 139/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-42
3.10 Rename Site or Cell
I. Function
This function is used to rename site or cell. All sites and cells can be renamed in one
dynamic operation.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [BTS/Rename Site or Cell], the [Rename Site or Cell] interface will pop
up in Figure 3-53.
Figure 3-53 Rename Site or Cell
First select site or cell that need be renamed, then click <Rename Selected Object>
in Figure 3-53. Rename dialog box will be shown in Figure 3-54 or Figure 3-55according to the type of selected object (site or cell).
Figure 3-54 Rename Site
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 140/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-43
Figure 3-55 Rename Cell
Note:
Only site or cell can be renamed in Figure 3-53. Please select [Cell/External Cell/Modify] operation to
rename external cell.
2) After renaming sites and cells, click <Next> in Figure 3-53 to continue. In the
dynamic configuration interface, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the
dynamic configuration of renaming site or cell.
IV. Verification
Check the data tables to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 141/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-44
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[BSC cell table], [TRX configuration table], [radio channel configuration table], [site BIE configuration
table], [signaling channel link table], [system information table], [cell configuration table], [normal
handover table], [cell allocation table], [BA1 (BCCH) table], [BA2 (SACCH) table], [cell attribute table],
[cell alarm threshold table], [cell call control table], [cell call control parameter table], [cell description
table], [Handover control table], [GSM0508 handover table], [load handover table], [intra-cell continuous
HO control table], [penalty table], [filter table], [emergency handover table], [adjacent cell relation table],
[power control selection table], [ordinary cell power control table], [BTS power control table], [MS power
control table], [radio channel management control table], [site description table], [site slot description
table], [carrier configuration table], [fast-moving handover table], [site frame description table], [HW II
channel allocation table], [Site Reserved Parameter Table] , [Cell Reserved Parameter Table] , [TRX
Reserved Parameter Table].
3.11 Modify Ring Topology Mark
I. Function
This function is used to modify ring topology mark. For example, add or delete
reverse ring port in ring topology.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [BTS/Modify Ring Topology Mark], the [Modify Ring Topology Mark]
interface will pop up in Figure 3-56.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 142/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-45
Figure 3-56 Select BIE Board (Modify Ring Topology Mark)
Select BIE board to activate button <Next>.
Note:
Only the BIE board whose relay mode is full rate ring topology or half rate ring topology can be selected
in Figure 3-56.
2) Click <Next> in Figure 3-56, the interface will be shown in
Figure 3-57 Modify Topology Mark (Modify Ring Topology Mark)
First select BIE port that need modify ring topology mark. If the selected BIE port has
already reverse ring port, the button <delete topology mark> will be usable and the
button <add topology mark> will be unusable, otherwise the button <add topology
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 143/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-46
mark> will be usable and the button <delete topology mark> will be unusable. Only
one BIE port’s ring topology mark can be modified in one dynamic operation.
A. Step of adding topology mark:
After selecting BIE port, then select the site that will connect to reverse ring port, click
<add topology mark> to enter the interface shown in Figure 3-58.
Figure 3-58 Configure Closed Loop BIE Port
Select closed loop BIE port in Figure 3-58, then click <OK> to return Figure 3-57.
B. Step of deleting topology mark
After selecting BIE port, click <delete topology mark> to delete reverse BIE port.
3) After modifying ring topology mark, click <Next> in to continue. In the dynamic
configuration interface, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic
configuration of modifying ring topology mark.
Figure 3-59 Dynamic Configuration (Modify Ring Topology Mark)
IV. Verification
Check the data tables to see whether the related data has been correctly modified.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 144/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Chapter 3 Configure BTS Data
3-47
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[radio channel configuration table], [LAPD semi-perm. Connection table], [LAPD signaling connection
table], [BSC BIE description table], [site BIE trunk mode description table], [site BIE configuration table],
[signaling channel link table], [site description table], [trunk circuit table], [BSC BIE semi-permanent
connection table], [BSC BIE active/stby. group table].
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 145/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-1
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
This section is an introduction to online add and delete cells and modify cell
properties.
4.1 Add Cell
I. Function
This function is used to online add one or more cells. Generally one cell will be added
at each time.
Caution:
1) In the case of chain and tree networking, if the new cell fails to operate normally, it is recommended
that BTSs on the link where this site located be reset successively from the one at the uppermost level.
In addition, BIE can also be reset. Check the correctness of the data configuration.
2) After successfully adding a cell, the Startup Traffic Statistics Re-register should be performed. (BTS\Startup Traffic Stat. Re-register)
II. Preparation
1) TRX also will be added during the process of the "Add Cell" operation. Each
dynamic configuration only can add a cell and its TRX to one site under one BIE port.
If the TRXs of the new cell are distributed in multiple BIE ports, select the [BTS/Add
TRX] to add TRX after the 4.1 Add Cell operation.
2) If adding a TRX during adding a cell changes the port cascade relationship of a site,
be sure to modify Internal Site Port Cascade Relationship. For more details, refer to
Add a site or Add TRX in Chapter 3.
3) If the new cell has adjacent relationship with others, please Select the [Cell/Modify
Cell’s Handover Parameter] to configure the adjacent relationship between two cells
after adding the cell.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 146/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-2
4) If the BIE port of the site to which the new cell is added is in Manual Mode of
timeslot adjustment, be sure to manually adjust timeslot. For more details, refer to
Add a Site or Add TRX in Chapter 3.
5) Dynamic adding or deleting of subsidiary chain is not supported in the system.
Usually configuration of multi-chain should have been completed in the initial
configuration.
III. Procedure
For example, add a non-FH cell without adjacent cells to Site0 in BM1.
1) Select the [Cell/Add Cell], the [Add Cell] interface will pop up. Select the BTS to be
added cell as shown in Figure 4-1.
Figure 4-1 Select site
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-2.
Figure 4-2 Add TRX
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 147/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-3
Note:
This step is the same as the operation in " Add TRX ". For more details, please refer to " Add TRX ".
3) Select "2 TRX" and "3 TRX" to be added and click <Next> to continue. See
Figure 4-3.
Figure 4-3 Add cell
4) Click <Modify Site Property> to configure the property of the BTS hardware.
If the newly-added TRX changes the internal transparent transmission relationship
inside the site, be sure to modify the site internal cascading connections here, i.e.,
click <Inter-Site Link> in the [Site Device’s Property] interface. For more details, refer
to Add a site in Chapter 3.
Note:
In Figure 4-3, all the existing cells and added cell of "Site0", are listed in the "Cell List". But <Delete Cell>
is only for the cells added in this step.
5) In Figure 4-3, click <Add Cell> and the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 4-4.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 148/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-4
Figure 4-4 Modify cell basic information
Input the corresponding cell information here. For more parameter descriptions,
please refer to the step of adding cell in " Add a Site". Then click <OK> to continue.
The newly-added cell, Site0-3, is now listed in [Cell List]. See Figure 4-5.
Figure 4-5 Add cell (Site0-3)
6) In Figure 4-5, select the new cell and click <Modify Cell Property> and the interface
will pop up as shown in Figure 4-6.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 149/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-5
Figure 4-6 Figure Set cell property
After configuring the properties of the cells added, click <Next> to continue.
7) If the BIE port of the site in which the newly added cell is located, is in the Manual
Mode of timeslot adjustment, be sure to manually adjust the timeslot. See Figure 4-7.
Otherwise go to Step 8) directly.
For more details, refer to Add a Site or Add TRX in Chapter 3.
Figure 4-7 Adjust manually
After finishing timeslot adjustment, click <Next> to continue.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 150/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-6
8) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of
adding the new cell. See Figure 4-8.
Figure 4-8 Command list during dynamic configuration
IV. Verification
1) When the Site Maintenance System is running, object representing the newly
added cell can be displayed.
2) Check the channel status of the cell. If all carriers are powered on and in normal
condition, all channels in a cell will be in idle status. Calls can be established on newlyadded cells.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[HWII power control table], [BSC Cell table], [TRX configuration table], [Radio channel config. table],
[LAPD semi-perm. connection table], [LAPD signaling connection table], [BSC BIE active/stby. group
table], [BSC BIE description table], [Site BIE trunk mode descr. table], [Site BIE configuration table],
[Signaling channel link table], [System information table], [Cell configuration table], [Normal handover table], [Cell Allocation table], [BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table], [Cell attribute table], [Cell alarm
threshold table], [Cell call control table], [Cell call control para. table], [Cell module information table],
[Handover control table], [GSM0508 handover table], [Load handover table], [Intra-cell cont. HO ctrl.
table], [Penalty table], [Filter table], [Emergency handover table], [Adjacent Cell Relation table], [Power
control selection table], [Ordinary cell power control table], [BTS power control table], [MS power control
table], [Radio CH management ctrl. table], [Site description table], [Site slot description table], [Carrier
configuration table], [External cell description table], [Fast-moving handover table], [Cell module
information table], [Frequency hopping table], [Site frame description table], [HW II channel allocation
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 151/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-7
table], [Antenna and feeder config. table], [Concentric cell handover table], [Site Software Configuration
table], [Cell reserved parameter table], [TRX reserved parameter table].
4.2 Delete Cell
I. Function
This function is used to online delete a cell. Only one cell should be deleted at a time.
Caution:
1) In the case of chain and tree networking, if the site whose cell has been deleted fails to operate
normally, it is recommended that BTSs on the link where this site can be located be reset successively
from the one at the uppermost level. In addition, BIE can also be reset. Check the correctness of the
data configuration.
2) After successfully adding a cell, the Startup Traffic Statistics Re-register should be performed. (BTS\
Startup Traffic Stat. Re-register)
II. Preparation
1) Before this cell deletion, block operation should be executed through Site
Maintenance System for the specific cells. This avoids remaining conversation during
deleting cell.
2) When the cell is deleted, all the TRXs of it will also be deleted. It is not allowed to
delete the cell which is the only one of a site, while to select the [BTS/Delete a Site] to
delete it, please refer to Delete a Site in Chapter 3.
3) If the BIE port of the site in which the cell to be deleted is in the Manual Mode of
timeslot adjustment, be sure to manually adjust the timeslot. For more details, refer to
Add a Site or Add TRX in Chapter 3.
III. Procedure
For example, delete the cell "Site 0-1" in Site0 in BM1. The BIE port of Site0 is not in
Manual Mode of timeslot adjustment.
1) Select the [Cell/Delete Cell], the [Delete Cell] interface will pop up. Select the cell
to be deleted in it as shown in Figure 4-9.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 152/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-8
Figure 4-9 Select cell
Caution:
If there is only one cell in the BTS, it is not allowed to delete this cell. Please delete the BTS to delete the
cell. <Next> button is unavailable and system will hint that current operation is not allowed, if this cell has
been selected.
2) Click <Next> to continue.
3) If the BIE port of the site in which the cell to be deleted is in the Manual Mode of
timeslot adjustment, be sure to adjust manually timeslot. See Figure 4-10. Otherwise
go to Step 4) directly.
For more details, refer to Add a Site or Add TRX in Chapter 3.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 153/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-9
Figure 4-10 Adjust manually
4) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of
deleting cell. See Figure 4-11.
Figure 4-11 Command list during dynamic configuration
IV. Verification
View from the Site Maintenance System, the specified cell has been deleted.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 154/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-10
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[HWII power control table], [BSC Cell table], [TRX configuration table], [Radio channel config. table],[LAPD semi-perm. connection table], [LAPD signaling connection table], [BSC BIE active/stby. group
table], [BSC BIE description table], [Site BIE trunk mode descr. table], [Site BIE configuration table],
[Signaling channel link table], [System information table], [Cell configuration table], [Normal handover
table], [Cell Allocation table], [BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table], [Cell attribute table], [Cell alarm
threshold table], [Cell call control table], [Cell call control para. table], [Cell module information table],
[Handover control table], [GSM0508 handover table], [Load handover table], [Intra-cell cont. HO ctrl.
table], [Penalty table], [Filter table], [Emergency handover table], [Adjacent Cell Relation table], [Power
control selection table], [Ordinary cell power control table], [BTS power control table], [MS power control
table], [Radio CH management ctrl. table], [Site description table], [Site slot description table], [Carrier
configuration table], [External cell description table], [Fast-moving handover table], [Cell module
information table], [Frequency hopping table]. [Site frame description table], [HW II channel allocation
table], [Antenna and feeder config. table], [Concentric cell handover table], [Site Software Configuration
table], [Cell reserved parameter table], [TRX reserved parameter table].
4.3 Modify BCC and NCC
I. Function
This function is used to online modify NCC (network color code) and BCC (BTS color
code). NCCs and BCCs of multiple cells can be modified at a time. The number of all
selected cells cannot be more than 10.
Caution:
This function has an effect on the calls established within this cell.
II. Preparation
Block operation for the entire cell should be performed through the Site Maintenance
System.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 155/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-11
III. Procedure
1) Select the [Cell/Modify BCC and NCC], the [Modify BCC and NCC] interface will
pop up. Select the cells to be modified in it as shown in Figure 4-12.
Figure 4-12 Select cell
Caution:
In view of the load of GMPU, commands generated by dynamic operation are restricted. The commands
set to GMPU at a time cannot be more than 255 per BM module. The commands generated by dynamic
operation are the total of the ones generated by current operation and related ones, e.g., the command
generated by the current operation of modifying BCC and NCC is "Modify BCC and NCC", the related
command is "Modify Cell's Handover Parameter".
The reason is the same as described above that the commands generated by dynamic operation cannot
be more than 255 in the following operations. So the number if cells to be dynamic configured is almost
unlimited except “Modify NCC and BCC”, “Modify Cell’s Channel Management Parameter”, “Modify
Cell’s Install Status” and “Modify GPRS Function”. These dynamic configurations can only operate 10
cells at most once because of the limitation of GMPU.
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-13.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 156/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-12
Figure 4-13 Modify the BCC and BCC
3) Modify NCC and BCC of each cell, and then click <Next> to continue. Click <Start
Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of modifying NCC
and BCC of the cell. See Figure 4-14.
Figure 4-14 Command list during dynamic configuration
IV. Verification
1) View the NCC and BCC of the modified cell through the Site Maintenance System.
2) View the NCC and BCC of the modified cell included in system information sent by
cell with test MS.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 157/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-13
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Cell module information table], [Handover control table], [GSM0508 handover table], [Load handover table], [Intra-cell cont. HO ctrl. table], [Penalty table], [Filter table], [Emergency handover table],
[Adjacent Cell Relation table], [Normal handover table], [BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table],
[External cell description table], [Fast-moving handover table], [Concentric cell handover table], [BSC
Cell table], [Frequency hopping table].
4.4 Modify Cell's Property
I. Function
This function is used in the dynamic modification of cell property data such as
interference threshold, SACCH multiframe number, CCCH payload threshold, RACH
busy threshold, and other property value that characterize the property of this cell.
Caution:
To modify the cell extending type as "Normal Cell", "Single Timeslot Extension Cell" or "Double Timeslot
Extension Cell", please select the [Cell/Modify Double Timeslots Related Property] to modify the property.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [Cell/Modify Cell's Property], the [Modify Cell's Property] interface will
pop up. Select the cell to be modified in it as shown in Figure 4-15.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 158/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-14
Figure 4-15 Select cell
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-16.
Figure 4-16 Select the cell whose property is to be modified
3) Select each cell and modify its property. After the modification, click <Next> to
continue and the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 4-17.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 159/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-15
Figure 4-17 Modify cell property
Reference:
"5. Cell Property" in "8.4.1 Default Data" in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller
Data Configuration Reference – Initial Configuration
4) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of
modifying cell property. See Figure 4-18.
Figure 4-18 Command list during dynamic configuration
IV. Verification
View the property parameters of the corresponding cells from the Site Maintenance
System.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 160/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-16
Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run BSC Data Management System to
check the [Cell/Cell Attribute Table].
4.5 Modify Cell's Call Control Parameter
I. Function
This function is used to online modify the call processing parameters including [Cell
call control table] and [Cell call control para. table].
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [Cell/Modify Cell's Call Control Parameter], the [Modify Cell's Call
Control Parameter] interface will pop up. Select the cell to be modified in it as shown
in Figure 4-19.
Figure 4-19 Select cell
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-20.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 161/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-17
Figure 4-20 Select the cell whose parameter is to be modified
3) Select the cell in the [Current Cell] box and click <Modify Cell Call Control
Parameter> to modify its call processing parameter. See Figure 4-21.
Figure 4-21 Modify call control parameter
Reference:
"2. Call Control" in "8.4.1 Default Data" in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data
Configuration Reference – Initial Configuration
4) After modifying the call control parameter and cell call processing parameter, click
<Next>. And then click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to the dynamic configuration of
modifying cell call control and processing parameters. See Figure 4-22.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 162/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-18
Figure 4-22 Command list during dynamic configuration
IV. Verification
1) Use test MS to do call test.
2) Check the call control parameter of the cell in the tracing result of Abis interface.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:[Cell call control table], [Cell call control para. table].
4.6 Modify Cell's Alarm Limit
I. Function
This function is used to modify the alarm threshold parameter of the cell.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [Cell/Modify Cell's Alarm Limit], the [Modify Cell's Alarm Limit] interface
will pop up. Select the cell to be modified in it as shown in Figure 4-23.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 163/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-19
Figure 4-23 Select cell
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-24.
Figure 4-24 Modify alarm parameter
Reference:
"1. Alarm Limit" in "8.4.1 Default Data" in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data
Configuration Reference – Initial Configuration
3) Select each cell and modify the alarm threshold parameters one by one. After the
modification, click <Next> to continue. Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to
implement the dynamic configuration of modifying cell alarm threshold. See
Figure 4-25.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 164/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-20
Figure 4-25 Command list during dynamic configuration
IV. Verification
Query all alarm threshold parameters from the Site Maintenance System.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Cell alarm threshold table].
4.7 Modify Cell's FH Property
I. Function
This function is used to online modify FH mode of the cell, including transformation
from non-FH cells to FH cells, and from FH cells to non-FH cells; and to online modify
FH data of the cell, including HSN, TSC, MA, MAIO, etc.
The system supports baseband FH and RF FH. Baseband FH includes FH with main
BCCH and FH without main BCCH.
Caution:
This function has an effect on the call carried out within this cell.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 165/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-21
II. Preparation
1) Block the cell from the Site Maintenance System first.
2) The single frequency cell can not be modified as FH cell and baseband FH is not
supported by BTS20 or double-TS cell. For the double-TS cell and baseband FH cell,
TRXs belonging to the same MA group enjoy the same TRX concentric properties.
3) The same MA group of GSM 900&1800 cell enjoys the frequencies of same
frequency band.
The cell with a single TRX can not be modified as FH cell and baseband FH is not
supported by BTS20. For the double timeslots extension cell participating in
baseband FH, One MA group can only be employed by the TRXs which concentric
properties are same.
III. Procedures
For example, to modify the cell "Site1-1" in BM1 as RF FH cell and "Site1-2" as FH
cell with main BCCH.
1) Select the [Cell/Modify Cell's FH Property], the [Modify Cell's FH Property] interface
will pop up. Select the cells, "Site1-1" and "Site1-2," to be modified in it as shown in
Figure 4-26.
Figure 4-26 Select cell
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-27.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 166/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-22
Figure 4-27 Modify FH property
3) Select "Site1-1" and modify its cell FH. Click <Modify Cell FH> to enter the
interface shown in Figure 4-28.
Figure 4-28 Modify FH property
Reference:
"8.4.2 FH property" in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data Configuration
Reference – Initial Configuration
In Figure 4-28, modify FH mode as RF FH and the [Confirm] dialogue "This operation
can not be resumed. Continue (Yes/No)?" will pop up. Click <Yes> to confirm. Then all
the effective frequencies of this cell will be configured into an MA group in default, the
number of MA group is 0. Now timeslots of all the TRXs belongs to MA 0 and,
<Configure MA Group> in the interface is available. Click it to add MA groups and
configure HSN. For more details of adding FH MA groups, please refer to Step 5).
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 167/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-23
Note:
1) In Figure 4-28, click < MAIO Synchronization By Timeslot> to synchronize the FH Group Number and
MAIO of all timeslots in every TRX as that of the current timeslot.2) < MAIO Synchronization By Timeslot> is available to every timeslot if FH mode is RF FH.
3) When the FH mode of RF FH cell is modified as "Not FH" , all the original frequencies of TRXs will be
deleted except for the one of main BCCH TRX. Be sure to re-allocate frequencies to the TRXs without
main BCCH TRX by double clicking the TRX listed in the [TRX No.] list shown in Figure 4-28.
4) Can’t change “RF FH” to “Base FH” directly and vice verse. You should change it to “Not FH” first and
then change it to corresponding FH mode.
4) In Figure 4-27, select "Site1-2" and click <Modify Cell FH>. The interface as
Figure 4-28 will pop up. In the [FH Property-Site1-2] interface, select "Baseband FH"
in the [FH Mode] drop-down list box, then click <Yes> in the [Confirm] pop-up
dialogue "Does the baseband FH support timeslot FH?". Then the TRX with main
BCCH will participate in the baseband FH.
5) When FH with main BCCH is selected, 2 FH groups will be configured to the cell by
default. One contains main BCCH frequency (FH Group No.1), and the other does not
(FH Group No.0). Now <Configure MA Group> is available and click it to add MA
groups. See Figure 4-29.
Figure 4-29 Set MA group
In Figure 4-29, add or delete MA group number in Zone1, select current MA group
number in Zone2 and the frequencies in Zone3 vary accordingly with different
selection in Zone2. The frequencies in Zone3 can also be modified manually.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 168/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-24
Caution:
1)
When FH with main BCCH is selected, <MAIO Synchronization By Timeslot> in Figure 4-28 isunavailable to the timeslot of main BCCH, i.e., TS0. It is only available to TS1~TS7.
2) In Figure 4-28, "FH Group No." is the number of the FH group among all the FH groups in this cell.
6) In Figure 4-28, double click the TRX listed in the [TRX No.] list to configure
frequency, as shown in Figure 4-30.
Figure 4-30 Modify frequency
7) After modification, click <Next>. And then click <Start Dynamic Configuration> toimplement the dynamic configuration of modifying cell FH property. See Figure 4-31.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 169/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-25
Figure 4-31 Command list during dynamic configuration
IV. Verification
1) Check FH data and channel status of the corresponding cells from the Site
Maintenance System.
2) Check the traffic of this cell in the traffic statistics system, compare the traffic
changing.
3) If necessary, use the test MS to check the FH data of this cell and do call test.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Cell configuration table], [Cell Allocation table], [Radio channel config. table], [Carrier configuration
table], [Frequency hopping table], [BA1 (BCCH) table], [BA2 (SACCH) table].
4.8 Modify Cell's Handover Parameter
I. Function
This function is used to online modify the cell handover parameters, including
handover parameter, adjacent relationship, BA1 and BA2 table.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 170/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-26
Caution:
1) The modification of cell adjacent relationship can create the single directional adjacent relationshipand the bidirectional adjacent relationship of two cells.
2) Cell BA1 and BA2 tables data will be refreshed automatically according to the adjacent relationships
of the current cell and the BCCH frequencies of the adjacent cells by the system.
3) BA1 table and BA2 table can be configured manually, but be sure to select "User Input" in the [Cell
BA1 & BA2 Table] interface. If BA1 & BA2 tables data is to be modified later, such as to modify cell
effective frequency and BCCH frequency of adjacent cell, they should be modified manually since they
will not be modified automatically by the system.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [Cell/Modify Cell's Handover Parameter], the [Modify Cell's Handover
Parameter] interface will pop up. Select the cell to be modified in it as shown in
Figure 4-32.
Figure 4-32 Select cell
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-33.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 171/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-27
Figure 4-33 Modify cell handover data
3) Select each cell and click <Modify Handover Parameter> to enter the interface
shown in Figure 4-34.
Figure 4-34 Modify handover control data
Reference:
"8.4.4 Handover Parameter" in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data
Configuration Reference – Initial Configuration
4) In Figure 4-33, select each cell and click <Modify Adjacent Relationship> to enter
the interface shown in Figure 4-35.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 172/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-28
Figure 4-35 Modify adjacent relationship property
Reference:
Adjacent Cell Relation Table in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data
Configuration Reference – Initial Configuration
Note:
In Figure 4-35, all the cells in all the BMs and the external cells in other BSC will be listed in "System cell
list". The corresponding cell or external cell can be selected to configured adjacent relationship.
5) In Figure 4-33, select each cell and click <Modify BA1 and BA2 Table> to enter the
interface shown in Figure 4-36.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 173/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-29
Figure 4-36 Modify BA1 and BA2 table
All the BA1 and BA2 tables are automatically generated. To make a special modify,
please select "User Input" first.
6) After modification, click <Next> shown in Figure 4-33. And then click <Start
Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of modifying cell
handover. See Figure 4-37.
Figure 4-37 Command list during dynamic configuration
IV. Verification
1) Check the traffic statistics of handover from traffic statistics system.
2) Do call test including handover test with the test MS.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 174/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-30
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Cell module information table], [Handover control table], [GSM0508 handover table], [Load handover table], [Intra-cell cont. HO ctrl. table], [Penalty table], [Filter table], [Emergency handover table],
[Adjacent Cell Relation table], [Normal handover table], [BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table],
[External cell description table], [Fast-moving handover table], [Concentric cell handover table].
4.9 Modify Cell's Power Control Parameter
I. Function
This function is used to modify the power control parameter of a cell, including normal
cell power control, BTS power control, MS power control, Huawei II power control, etc.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [Cell/Modify Cell's Power Control Parameter], the [Modify Cell's Power Control Parameter] interface will pop up. Select the cell to be modified in it as shown
in Figure 4-38.
Figure 4-38 Select cell
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-39.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 175/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-31
Figure 4-39 Modify cell power control data
3) Select each cell and click <Modify Power Control Parameter> to enter the interface
shown in Figure 4-40.
Figure 4-40 Configure power control parameter
Reference:
"8.4.6 Power Control Parameter" in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data
Configuration Reference – Initial Configuration
4) After modifying power control parameter, click <Next> shown in Figure 4-39. Click
<Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of modifying
cell power control parameter. See Figure 4-41.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 176/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-32
Figure 4-41 Command list dynamic during dynamic configuration
IV. Verification
Check the corresponding power control parameter by viewing the host data.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[HWII power control table], [Power control selection table], [Ordinary cell power control table], [BTS
power control table], [MS power control table].
4.10 Modify Cell's Channel Management Parameter
I. Function
This function is used to modify the cell channel management parameters, including
radio channel management control parameters and HW II channel allocation
algorithm.
II. Preparation
None.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 177/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-33
III. Procedure
1) Select the [Cell/Modify Cell's Channel Management Parameter], the [Modify Cell's
Channel Management Parameter] interface will pop up. Select the cell to be modifiedin it as shown in Figure 4-42.
Figure 4-42 Select cell
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-43.
Figure 4-43 Select the cell whose parameter is to be modified
3) Select each cell and click <Modify Cell’s Channel Management Parameter> to
enter the interface shown in Figure 4-44.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 178/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-34
Figure 4-44 Configure cell channel management parameter
Reference:
"8.4.7 Channel Management Parameter" in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller
Data Configuration Reference – Initial Configuration
4) After modification, click <OK>. Then in the interface shown in Figure 4-43, click
<Next>. In the interface shown in Figure 4-45, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to
implement the dynamic configuration, i.e., the data of modified cell channelmanagement parameter property.
Figure 4-45 Command list during dynamic data configuration
IV. Verification
Select the [Start/Task/Data Management/Operations/View Host Data…] to check the
host data.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 179/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-35
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Radio CH management ctrl. table], [HW II channel allocation table].
4.11 Modify Cell's CGI
I. Function
This function is used to modify CGI (Global Cell Identification). The number of the
cells to be selected for one dynamic operation cannot exceed 10.
Caution:
1) This function has an effect on the call served by this cell.
2) Modification of CGI involves data of MSC. Therefore, when modifying CGI, guarantee the consistency
of the relative data. Otherwise, the cell will fail to implement location updating and call establishment.
3) Hexadecimal system is adopted for CGI.
II. Preparation
Perform block processing for a designated cell from the Site Maintenance System.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [Cell/Modify Cell's CGI], the [Modify Cell's CGI] interface will pop up.
Select a cell to be modified in it as shown in Figure 4-46.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 180/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-36
Figure 4-46 Select cell
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-47.
Figure 4-47 Modify cell's CGI
3) Select each cell, modify CGI. After modification, click <Next>.
4) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of
CGI. See Figure 4-48.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 181/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-37
Figure 4-48 Command list for Dynamic Configuration Procedure
IV. Verification
1) Check CGI in cell system message received with a test MS.
2) Check CGI by tracing Abis interface of this cell.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:[BSC Cell table], [Cell module information table], [External cell description table], [Cell module
information table], [Frequency hopping table].
4.12 Modify Cell's System Information
I. Function
This function is used to modify system information parameters, including [Cell
configuration table], [System information table], [BA1(BCCH) table] and [BA2(SACCH)
table]. For the configuration of "SMCBC DRX", please refer to 4.13 Modify Cell's
Broadcast DRX Property.
II. Preparation
None.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 182/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-38
III. Procedure
1) Select the [Cell/Modify Cell's System Information], the [Modify Cell's System
Information] interface will pop up. Select the cell to be modified in it as shown inFigure 4-49.
Figure 4-49 Select cell
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-50.
Figure 4-50 Select the cell whose parameter is to be modified
3) Select each cell and click <Modify Cell Configuration Data> to enter the interface
shown in Figure 4-51.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 183/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-39
Figure 4-51 Modify Cell Configuration Data
Reference:
8.4.1 Default Data" in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data Configuration
Reference – Initial Configuration
4) Select each cell and click <Modify Cell System Information> to enter the interface
shown in Figure 4-52.
Figure 4-52 Modify cell system information
Reference:
8.4.3 System Information in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data Configuration
Reference – Initial Configuration
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 184/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-40
5) In Figure 4-50, select each cell and click <Modify BA1 and BA2 Table> to enter the
interface shown in Figure 4-53.
Figure 4-53 Modify BA1 and BA2 table
All the BA1 and BA2 tables are automatically generated. To make a special modify,
please select "User Input" first.
6) After modification, click <OK>. Then click <Next> shown in Figure 4-50. Then click
<Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration, i.e., the dataof modified cell system message. See Figure 4-54.
Figure 4-54 Command list for dynamic configuration
IV. Verification
1) View the host data, and the modified parameters should be found correct.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 185/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-41
2) Through tracing Abis interface message, issued system message can be viewed.
Check the content of each system message to see whether all system message
parameters are correctly modified.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Cell Allocation table], [BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table], [System information table], [BSC Cell
table], [Cell configuration table].
4.13 Modify Cell's Broadcast DRX Property
I. Function
This function supports the dynamic modification to the Cell Broadcast Service DRX
property of cell.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [Cell/Modify Cell's Broadcast DRX Property], the [Modify Cell's
Broadcast DRX Property] interface will pop up. Select the cell to be modified in it as
shown in Figure 4-55.
Figure 4-55 Select cell
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 186/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-42
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface shown in Figure 4-56.
Figure 4-56 Modify DRX Function
3) Select each cell and modify [Support DRX Mode]. After the modification, click
<Next> to continue.
4) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration, i.e.,
the data of modified cell support DRX property. See Figure 4-57.
Figure 4-57 Command list for dynamic configuration
IV. Verification
View the data in the host, the parameter modified should be correct.
Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run BSC Data Management System to
check the [Cell/Cell Configuration Table], "Support DRX mode" is correctly configured.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 187/283
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 188/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-44
Figure 4-58 Select cell
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-59.
Figure 4-59 Modify cell install status
3) Select the cell listed in [Current Cell], modify its install status and then click <Next>
to continue.
4) Click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of the
cell install status. See Figure 4-60.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 189/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-45
Figure 4-60 Command list during dynamic configuration
IV. Verification
1) Check the corresponding site on the Site Maintenance System. If the status
"installed" of a cell has been modified as "not installed" successfully, this cell
disappears in the cell list of the site.
2) If the status "not installed" of a cell has been modified as "installed" successfully,
the new cell appears in the cell list of the site.
3) Check the channel status of the newly added cell. Calls can be made in the newlyadded cells.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[BSC Cell table], [Cell module information table], [Site slot description table].
4.15 Modify Cell's Allocation Table (BA1 & BA2 Table)
I. Function
Online modify the available frequency of the cell, including adding or deleting cell
available frequency. This function is also used to add main BCCH frequency of the
not-adjacent cell for network optimization and maintenance.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 190/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-46
Caution:
1) The data in BA1 table and BA2 table will be automatically refreshed by the system according to theBCCH frequencies of adjacent cells.
2) BA1 table and BA2 table can be configured manually, but be sure to select "User Input" in the [Cell
BA1 & BA2 Table] interface when saving data. If the data of BA1 & BA2 tables has to be modified later
(e.g., modify cell available frequency and BCCH frequency of adjacent cells), they have to be modified
manually because system will not update the data automatically.
II. Preparation
The available frequencies used in the cell cannot be deleted. To delete them, please
implement 4.17 Modify TRX’s Property operation to release the frequencies used,
then implement 4.15 Modify Cell's Allocation Table (BA1 & BA2 Table) operation to
delete them.
III. Procedure
For example, add available frequency 607 and 610 to Site1-1 in BM1, and delete the
unused frequency 616
1) Select the [Cell/Modify Cell Allocation Table (BA1 & BA2 Table)], the [Modify Cell
Allocation Table (BA1 & BA2 Table)] interface will pop up. Select Site1-1 in it as
shown in Figure 4-61.
Figure 4-61 Modify Cell Allocation Table(BA1 & BA2 Table)
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-62.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 191/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-47
Figure 4-62 Modify Cell Allocation Table
3) Select Site1-1 and click <Modify Cell’s Available Frequency> to enter the interface
shown in Figure 4-63.
Figure 4-63 Select cell’s available frequency
Figure 4-63 shows the frequency frequencies in the Cell Allocation of the current cell..
Every pane indicates one frequency. The frequencies in the canary yellow panes
have been used in the cell, such as frequency 580, 581 and 598. The frequencies in
the yellow panes is not used in the cell but have been configured to the cell, such as
frequency 599, 616 and 617. Frequencies in the yellow panes can be released by
clicking the panes, but frequencies in the canary yellow panes cannot be released. .
In Figure 4-63, click the No. 607 and 610 panes to add the available frequencies to
the cell. Click the pane corresponding to No. 616 to delete the frequency.
4) After the modification, click <Next>. Then click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to
implement the dynamic configuration, i.e., the data of modified cell effective
frequencies. See Figure 4-64.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 192/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-48
Figure 4-64 Command list for dynamic configuration
IV. Verification
1) View the data in the host, to check the frequencies information in the host is
correct.
2) Use test MS to verify the modifying of frequencies.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:[Cell Allocation table], [Carrier configuration table], [Frequency hopping table].
[BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table].
4.16 Modify Double Timeslots Related Property
I. Function
This function is used to modify double timeslots related property of the cell, including
modifying "Cell Extension Type" as "Normal Cell", "Single Timeslot Extension Cell" or
"Double Timeslot Extension Cell", and modifying "HW_IUO Property" as "Overlaid
Subcell", "Underlaid Subcell" or "None".
Caution:
The modification to double timeslots related property will cause the level-4 reset of the site, and the
level-3 reset of other sites connected to its BIE port.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 193/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-49
Note:
1) Double timeslots extension cell means the cell whose "Cell extension type" is "Double Timeslot
Extension Cell". Double timeslot TRX means that the TRX is located in the double timeslot extension celland the "HW_IUO Property" of the TRX is "Underlaid Subcell".
2) The main BCCH TRX of the double timeslots extension cell must be the double timeslot TRX.
3) The TRXs belonging to the same MA group must be of the same type when baseband frequency is
configured, i.e., double timeslots TRX and normal TRX should not belong to the same MA group.
4) All the odd channels of double timeslot TRX cannot be modified.
II. Preparation
None
III. Procedure
For example, modify Site0-2 in BM1 as double timeslots extension cell.
1) Select the [Cell/Modify Double Timeslots Related Property], the [Modify Double
Timeslots Related Property] interface will pop up. Select "Site0-1" in it as shown in
Figure 4-65.
Figure 4-65 Modify double timeslots related property
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-66.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 194/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-50
Figure 4-66 Modify double timeslots related property (modify cell extension type)
Caution:
Values for [Cell Extension Type] cannot be shifted between "Normal Cell" and "Single Timeslot
Extension Cell". For the shift of values between the above two, implement 4.4 Modify Cell's Property
operation.
3) In Figure 4-66, select "Site0-1" in [Current Cell], and then select "Double Timeslots
Extension Cell" in [Cell Extension Type]. Click <Next>, the interface will pop up as
shown in Figure 4-67.
Figure 4-67 Modify double timeslots related property (modify cell extension type)
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 195/283
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 196/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-52
Property " of the two timeslots extension cells, please implement 4.16 Modify Double
Timeslots Related Property operation first.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [Cell/Modify TRX’s Property], the [Modify TRX’s Property] interface will
pop up. Select the cell of the TRX to be modified in it as shown in Figure 4-69.
Figure 4-69 Modify TRX’s property - select cell
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-70.
Figure 4-70 Modify TRX’s property - select TRX
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 197/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-53
3) Select the cell, and then select the TRXs whose properties are to be modified and
add them accordingly into the [TRX Needs Modify] list. Click <Modify TRX Property>,
the interface will pop up as shown in Figure 4-71.
Figure 4-71 Modify TRX property
Caution:
In this step, "TRX Priority" cannot be modified with this operation. To modify TRX priority, please first
implement operation described in 4.22 .
4) After property modification, click <OK> to enter the interface shown in Figure 4-72.
Then click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of
adding the modified data. See Figure 4-72.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 198/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-54
Figure 4-72 Command list for dynamic configuration
IV. Verification
Change in static power level of carrier can be viewed from the Site Maintenance
System.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Carrier configuration table], [Cell attribute table].
4.18 Modify DC Bias Voltage and RACH Min Access Level
I. Function
This function is used to modify the cell DC Bias Voltage and the RACH Minimum
Access Level.
Caution:
Normally DC Bias Voltage threshold parameter needs no adjustment.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 199/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-55
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [Cell/Modify DC bias Voltage and RACH Min Access Level], the [Modify
DC Bias Voltage and RACH Min Access Level] interface will pop up. Select the cell to
be modified in it as shown in Figure 4-73.
Figure 4-73 Select cell.
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-74.
Figure 4-74 Modify RACH Minimum Access Level
3) Select each cell, and modify the RACH Minimum Access Level and DC Bias
Voltage threshold for the cell.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 200/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-56
4) Click <Next> to continue, and then click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to
implement the dynamic configuration of modifying cell DC Bias Voltage and RACH
Minimum Access Level. See Figure 4-75.
Figure 4-75 Command list for dynamic configuration
IV. Verification
Check whether modified data is correct through viewing the host data.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Carrier configuration table], [Cell attribute table].
4.19 Modify TRX’s Channel Type
I. Function
This function is used to online modify channel type.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 201/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-57
Caution:
1) All TRXs of all sites under one BSC BIE port can be selected for one modification of the TRX channeltype in the cell.
2) Modify the TRX channel type of the cell in 15:1 trunk mode may result in BTS reset due to timeslot
rearrangement at Abis interface.
3) Modifying the channel type of the main BCCH or modifying the type of other channels into main
BCCH will cause level-4 reset of the BTS.
4) Under 15:1 configuration mode of Abis interface, there has to be sufficient trunk circuits and Abis
timeslots to modify SDCCH as TCH.
5) The odd channels of double timeslots TRX cannot be modified due to the data configuration
constraints of double timeslots extension cells.
6) Can’t modify main BCCH channel in 900-1800 Cell.
7) SDCCH channel must compatible with main BCCH channel.
8)PDCH channel and BCH channel must be in same frequency section with main BCCH channel in 900-
1800 cell.
II. Preparation
Block the channel to be modified in the Site Maintenance System.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [Cell/Modify TRX’s Channel Type], the [Modify TRX’s Channel Type]
interface will pop up, as shown in Figure 4-76.
Figure 4-76 Select BIE
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 202/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-58
2) Select the BIE under which the TRXs will be modified, and click <Next> to enter the
interface as shown in Figure 4-77.
Figure 4-77 Select BIE port
3)Select the BIE port under which the TRXs will be modified, and click <Next> to
enter the interface shown in Figure 4-78.
Figure 4-78 Select cell and TRX
4) Select the TRX whose channel type is to be modified, and click <Modify Channel
Type> to enter the interface shown in Figure 4-79.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 203/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-59
Figure 4-79 Configure channel property
Reference:
“(b) Modify TRX’s Channel Type" in "(2) Modify Cell’s FH Property" in "8.3.3 Modify
Cell’s FH Property" in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data Configuration
Reference – Initial Configuration
5) After the modification, click <Next> in Figure 4-78 to continue. Then click <Start
Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of modifying channel
type. See Figure 4-80.
Figure 4-80 Command list for dynamic configuration
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 204/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-60
IV. Verification
Check whether the information of channel type is corrected at the Site Maintenance
System.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Radio channel config. table], [Frequency hopping table], [System information table], [Site BIE trunk
mode descr. table], [BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table].
4.20 Modify TRX's Frequency
I. Function
This function is used to modify the frequency of a TRX. Usually, this is applied in
network optimization and BTS capacity expansion. This operation can also be used to
add available frequency to the cell.
Caution:
1) Modification to the BCCH frequency will cause the initialization of the cell.
2) TRX frequency must be compatible TRX’s type.
3) TRX frequency must be compatible TRX’s channels.
II. Preparation
Before frequency modification for the TRX, block this TRX through the Site
Maintenance System.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [Cell/Modify TRX's Frequency], the [Modify TRX's Frequency] interface
will pop up. Select the cell to which the TRX to be modified in it as shown in
Figure 4-81.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 205/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-61
Figure 4-81 Select cell
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-82.
Figure 4-82 Modify TRX frequency
3) Select each cell, and add the TRX whose frequency is to be modified, to the [TRX
needs modify] list. Then select each TRX in the list and click <Add Cell Effective
Freq.> to enter the interface shown in Figure 4-83.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 206/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-62
Figure 4-83 Select cell available TRX frequency
In the interface shown in Figure 4-82, select the TRX in the [TRX needs modify] list.
And then click <Modify TRX Freq.> to enter the interface shown in Figure 4-84.
Figure 4-84 Modify TRX property
4) After modification, click <Next>. And then click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to
implement the GPMU data configuration of modifying TRX frequency. See
Figure 4-85.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 207/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-63
Figure 4-85 Command list for dynamic configuration
IV. Verification
1) Check the frequency and the channel status of the corresponding TRX on the
Site Maintenance System.
2) Check the frequencies of the corresponding cell with test MS and do call test.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:[Carrier configuration table], [Frequency hopping table], [BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table], [Cell
Allocation table].
4.21 Modify GPRS Function
I. Function
This function is used to online modify GPRS function of the cell.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [Cell/Modify GPRS Function], the [Modify GPRS Function] interface will
pop up. Select the cell to be modified in it as shown in Figure 4-86.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 208/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-64
Figure 4-86 Modify GPRS function - select cell
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-87.
Figure 4-87 Modify GPRS function
3) In Figure 4-87, select the cell and then modify its GPRS property as "Not Support
GPRS" or "Support GPRS".
4) Click <Next>. Then click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic
configuration of modifying GPRS property to GPMU. See Figure 4-88.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 209/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-65
Figure 4-88 Command list for dynamic configuration
IV. Verification
Check the data in the host by viewing the host data.
Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run BSC Data Management System to
check the [Local-office/BSC Cell Table].
4.22 Modify TRX Priority
I. Function
This function is used to online modify the priority of TRX. Only one cell can be
selected for one modification.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [Cell/Modify TRX Priority], the [Modify TRX Priority] interface will pop up.
Select the cell to be modified in it as shown in Figure 4-89.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 210/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-66
Figure 4-89 Select cell
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-90.
Figure 4-90 Modify TRX’s priority
3) In Figure 4-90, select the TRX to be modified, then click <Modify TRX Priority
Level> to modify its priority level.
4) After the modification, click <Next>. Then click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to
implement the dynamic configuration of modifying TRX’s priority. See Figure 4-91.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 211/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-67
Figure 4-91 Command list for dynamic configuration
IV. Verification
Check the data in the host by viewing the host data.
Select the [Start/Task/Data Management] to run BSC Data Management System to
check the [Site/Carrier Configuration Table] to check the [Carrier configuration table].
4.23 External Cell
4.23.1 Add External Cell
I. Function
This function is used to add new external cells for BSC. The new external cells are
not adjacent with any of BSC cells. If need to configure adjacent cells for new external
cells, please select the [Cell]/[Modify Cell Handover Parameter] or [Cell]/[External
Cell]/[Modify] to complete the operation, after the operation of adding external cell.
Caution:
Adding external cell description data involves data of MSC and other BSCs. Therefore it is necessary to
guarantee the consistency of data.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 212/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-68
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [Cell/External Cell/Add], the [Add External Cell] interface will pop up as
shown in Figure 4-92.
Figure 4-92 Select external cell
Caution:
Only adding new external cell will <Delete External Cell> or <Modify External Cell> is allowed.
2) Click <Add External Cell> to add external cell. See Figure 4-93.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 213/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-69
Figure 4-93 Modify external cell property
Reference:
"8.3.5 Add External Cell" in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data Configuration
Reference – Initial Configuration
Reference:
Adjacent Cell Relation Table in M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data
Configuration Reference – Network Planning Parameters
3) After configuration, click <Next>. And then click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to
implement the dynamic configuration of adding external cells. See Figure 4-94.
Figure 4-94 Command list for dynamic configuration
IV. Verification
1) Check the data in the host.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 214/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-70
2) Check traffic statistics result of HO from Traffic Statistics System.
3) Do call and handover test with the test MS.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Cell module information table], [Handover control table], [GSM0508 handover table], [Load handover
table], [Intra-cell cont. HO ctrl. table], [Penalty table], [Filter table], [Emergency handover table],
[Adjacent Cell Relation table], [Normal handover table], [BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table],
[External cell description table], [Fast-moving handover table], [Concentric cell handover table].
4.23.2 Delete External Cell
I. Function
This function is used to delete a designated external cell.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [Cell/External Cell/Delete], the [Delete External Cell] interface will pop
up. Select the external cell to be deleted in it as shown in Figure 4-95.
Figure 4-95 Select external cell
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 215/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-71
2) Click <Next> to continue. And then click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to
implement the dynamic configuration of deleting the external cell. See Figure 4-96.
Figure 4-96 Command list for dynamic configuration
IV. Verification
Check the external cell data in the host by viewing the host data.
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Cell module information table], [Handover control table], [GSM0508 handover table], [Load handover
table], [Intra-cell cont. HO ctrl. table], [Penalty table], [Filter table], [Emergency handover table],
[Adjacent Cell Relation table], [Normal handover table], [BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table],
[External cell description table], [Fast-moving handover table], [Concentric cell handover table].
4.23.3 Modify External Cell
I. Function
This function is used to add/delete adjacent cells for a cell designated, and configure
handover parameters and external cell property parameters.
II. Preparation
None.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 216/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-72
III. Procedure
1) Select the [Cell/External Cell/Modify], the [Modify External Cell’s Property] interface
will pop up. Select the external cell whose property is to be modified in it as shown inFigure 4-97.
Figure 4-97 Select external cell
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-98.
Figure 4-98 Modify external cell adjacent relationship
3) Modify the adjacent relationship. It is allowed to configure the relationship of the
new adjacent cell of this external cell or to delete the original adjacent cell. Then click
<Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-99.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 217/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-73
Figure 4-99 External cell adjacent relationship
4) Modify the property of external cell, including HO parameter of all adjacent cells,
property of external cell, etc. After that, click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to modify
external cell property.
Figure 4-100 Command list for dynamic configuration
IV. Verification
1) Check the external cell data in the host by viewing the host data.
2) Do call and handover test with the test MS.
3) Check the traffic statistics result of HO from the Traffic statistics System.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 218/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-74
Note:
Tables involved in BSC Data Management System:
[Handover control table], [GSM0508 handover table], [Load handover table], [Intra-cell cont. HO ctrl.table], [Penalty table], [Filter table], [Emergency handover table], [Adjacent Cell Relation table], [Normal
handover table], [BA1(BCCH) table], [BA2(SACCH) table], [External cell description table], [Fast-moving
handover table], [Concentric cell handover table].
4.24 Batch Modify Cell's Network Parameter
I. Function
This function is used to modify the cell parameters in batch processing. This function
can be applied to reduce the amount of work involved in modifying cell parameters
and keep the data consistency in modification.
Caution:
1) Only the cell parameters with same type of command word can be selected each time.2) At most 10 cells can be selected for one dynamic batch modification.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [Cell/Batch Modify Cell's Network Parameter], the [Batch Modify Cell's
Network Parameter] interface will pop up. Select the cell to be modified in it as shown
in Figure 4-101.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 219/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-75
Figure 4-101 Select cell
2) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-102, then select the cell
parameters to be modified.
Figure 4-102 Select the cell parameter to be modified
3) Click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-103.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 220/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-76
Figure 4-103 Modify cell parameter
In the figure above, the item to be edited on the right will change as the cell parameter
selected currently varies. For example, if the cell parameter "Timed transmission" is
selected in the figure above, then the change is shown in Figure 4-104.
Figure 4-104 Select timed transmission parameter
If the value of the item on the right has not been modified, the system will modify
automatically the cell parameters of all the cells selected in default value.
4) By clicking the cell parameters in the list box of selected parameters to check
whether they have been modified, and then click <Next> to continue. Click <Start
Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of batch modifying
cell parameters. See Figure 4-105.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 221/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-77
Figure 4-105 Command list for dynamic configuration
Note:
In the figure above, the Dynamical configuration commands displayed in the list box changes as the cell
parameter type currently selected varies.
4.25 Configure RSL Flow Control Parameter
I. Function
This function is used to modify RSL flow control parameters of TRX.
II. Preparation
None.
III. Procedure
1) Select the [Cell/Config RSL Flow Ctrl Param], the [Config RSL Flow Ctrl Param]
interface will pop up, as shown in Figure 4-106.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 222/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-78
Figure 4-106 Select TRXs
2) Select the TRXs to be modified, and click <Config Flow Ctrl Param> to enter the
interface as shown in Figure 4-107.
Figure 4-107 Modify RSL flow control parameters of TRX
3) After modification, click <Next> to enter the interface as shown in Figure 4-108.
Then click <Start Dynamic Configuration> to implement the dynamic configuration of
modifying RSL flow control parameters of TRX.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 223/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Chapter 4 Configure Cell Data
4-79
Figure 4-108 Command list for dynamic configuration
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 224/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix A Abbreviations
A-1
Appendix A Abbreviations
A AM/CM Administration Module/Communication ModuleB BA BCCH AllocationBAM Back Administration ModuleBCC BTS Color CodeBCCH Broadcast Control CHannelBCH Broadcast channel (transport channel)BIE Base Station Interface EquipmentBITS Building Integrated Timing SupplyBM Basic ModuleBS Base StationBS1 Abis InterfaceBSC Base Station Controller BSMU Base Station Interface UnitBSS Base Station SubsystemBTS Base Transceiver StationC CA Cell AllocationCBCH Cell Broadcast CHannelCC Country CodeCCCH Common Control ChannelCCS Common Channel SignalingCDU Combiner and Divider UnitCGI Cell Global IdentificationCIC Circuit Identification CodeCRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CS-1 Code Scheme-1CS-2 Code Scheme-2CS-3 Code Scheme-3CS-4 Code Scheme-4CTN Central Switching Network BoardD DBF Database FileDPC Destination (Signaling) Point CodeDRX Discontinuous ReceptionDTX Discontinuous TransmissionE E3M E3 Sub-Multiplexer EAC External Alarm CollectionECSC Early Classmark Sending Control
EDU Enhanced Duplexer UnitEFR Enhanced full rate speech codeEST EstablishmentF FACCH Fast Associated Control ChannelFBC Photoelectric Conversion BoardFBI Optical Fiber Interface BoardFPU Frame Processing UnitFTC Full Rate Transcoder FTP File Transfer ProtocolFUL Radio Signaling LinkG GALM Alarm boardGCKS Clock sourceGCTN Central switching Network board
GEMA Emergency Action board
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 225/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix A Abbreviations
A-2
GFBI Fiber Interface boardGLAP LAPD Protocol Process boardGMC2 Inter-Module Communication boardGMCC Module Communication and Control boardGMEM Memory board
GMPU Main Process UnitGNET Switching Network boardGNOD Node Communication BoardGOPT Local Optical Interface BoardGPRS General Packet Radio ServiceGPS Global Position SystemGSM Global System for Mobile CommunicationsGSNT GSM Signaling Switching Network BoardH HDLC High-level Data Link Control
HO Handover
HPA High magnification Power Amplifier boardHSN Hopping Sequence Number HW HighwayI ID IDentification/IDentityIND IndicationIOMU iSite Operation and Maintenance UnitIP Internet ProtocolL LAPD Link Access Protocol on the D-channelLPN7 Common Channel Signaling Processing BoardM MA Mobile AllocationMAIO Mobile Allocation Index OffsetMCC Mobile Country CodeMCK Main Clock boardMFU Microcell Frame UnitMMU Multiplication and Management Unit
MNC Mobile Network CodeMS Mobile StationMSC Mobile Switching Center MSM MSC Subrate channel Multiplexer MTP Message Transfer PartN NCC Network Color CodeNSS Network SubSystemO OM Opration and MaintenanceOMC Operation and Maintenance Center OML Operation and Maintenance LinkOMU Operation and Maintenance UnitOPC Originating Point Code
P Pb Pb InterfacePBCCH Packet Broadcast Control ChannelPBGT Power BudgetPBU Power Boost UnitPCCCH Packet Common Control ChannelPCIC Packet Circuit Identity CodePCM Pulse-Code ModulationPCU Packet Control UnitPDH Plesiochronous Digital HierarchyPDTCH Packet Data Traffic ChannelPLMN Public Land Mobile NetworkPMU Power and Environment Monitoring UnitPSU Power Supply UnitPWC Secondary Power Supply BoardR
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 226/283
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 227/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-1
Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B.1 BSC Data
BSC data refers to the data related the rack, frame, board and resource allocation,
etc. It is used to describe the physical feature of BSC.
BSC is made up of hardware system and software system. Before they are put into
operation, they are independent of each other. For BSC to work normally, the
software system must exercise effective control over the hardware.
Software system masters the hardware configuration and the running character of
each hardware unit through BSC data configuration. Hardware system run normally
and supplies all kinds of call services with the controlling of software system.
B.1.1 Configuration Principles and Flow
BSC data configuration should follow the principle "from global to local". That means,
data configuration starts from configuration for the whole system, and then becomes
more specific gradually until it finally resorts to the configuration for each board.
The BSC data configuration consists of two large parts: AM/CM data configuration
and BM data configuration. Each of them follows the configuration sequence of
module→rack→frame→board→system resources, as shown in Figure B-1.
Module Data
Frame Data
Board Data
System Resources Data
Figure B-1 BSC data configuration flow
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 228/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-2
I. Module data configuration
Module data configuration refers to the data description of all the modules of BSC,
including module type, working status, inter-module communication and BAM
communication of AM/CM and every BM.
II. Frame and board data configuration
Frame and board data configuration involves such information as the type, location
and numbering of each hardware unit in the system.
III. System resource allocation
System resource allocation refers to the allocation of system internal resources,
including main control resources (GNOD), network resources (HW) and inter-module
communication resources (optical path and link), etc.
The software system of BSC adopts a fully-distributed control method, i.e., almost
every board carries relevant software to control its own hardware. But as a whole,
both hardware and software are coordinated and controlled by the central software.
To achieve this, the communications between the central software and distributed
software and that between distributed software are required. System resources are
used to meet the requirement of this internal communication.
Besides, there are also some public data to be configured, mainly the public
parameters used by some internal software as well as some parameters required for
hardware working under specific environment.
B.1.2 Numbering Principle
Each hardware unit is given a serial number for easy identification by the software
system. Together with other information, this serial number is sent to the software
system to effectively control the hardware system.
Serial numbers can also help maintenance engineers to perform routine maintenance
and locate the fault quickly and easily.
The hardware unit numbering includes the numbering of modules, racks, frames,
slots and boards. The principles of numbering are described as follows:
I. Numbering of modules
Modules are numbered sequentially in the whole BSC. In other words, the number of
a module in a BSC must be unique and there should be no other module that has the
same module number with it in the whole BSC system. Module number is the number
of modules (AM/CM and BM) configured in the system.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 229/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-3
AM/CM is fixedly numbered as Module0 and the numbering of BMs begins from 1 to 8,
as one AM/CM can have maximum of 8 BMs, Single-module BSC contains only one
BM, so the module number of BM is fixed as 1. See Figure B-2.
AM/CM
BM1 BM2 BM8
0
1 2 8
Figure B-2 Module numbering in the multi -module BSC
II. Numbering of racks
The same as the numbering of modules, racks are also numbered sequentially in the
whole BSC system.
For a multi-module BSC, the rack where the AM/CM is located is fixedly numbered as
Rack 0 and the racks of BMs are numbered sequentially from 1. In single-module
BSC, the rack of the BM is numbered as 1.
III. Numbering of frames
Frames are sequentially numbered within its module, i.e., frame number cannot be
repeated in a module, but the same frame number can exist in other modules.
Frames are fixedly numbered from 0 with the numbering sequence from bottom to top
and near to far. The frames are numbered from near to far means all the frames are
numbered in sequence from near to far according to the distance between the racks
where a frame is located and the main control rack in a muti-rack module.
In the BSC, each rack is made up of 6 standard frames. The frames are numbered in
sequence from bottom to top as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5, as shown in Figure B-3.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 230/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-4
AM/CM BM1 BM2
Frame 0
Frame 1
Frame 2
Frame 3
Frame 4
Frame 5
Frame 0
Frame 1
Frame 2
Frame 3
Frame 4
Frame 5
Frame 0
Frame 1
Frame 2
Frame 3
Frame 4
Frame 5
Figure B-3 Diagram of frame numbering
IV. Numbering of slots
There are 26 slots in each frame, numbered in sequence from left to right as 0~25.
Usually a board occupies only one slot while some boards occupy two slots, e.g.
GMPU and GMEM. The boards occupying two slots are normally configured in
even-numbered slots.
V. Numbering of boards
Board numbering is very important. It not only determines whether the board can
work normally, but also impacts the numbering of SS7 and LAPD links as well as
trunk circuits.
The numbering of the boards follows the following principles:
z The number of the board begins with 0.
z Boards are numbered sequentially in one module, i.e., in the same module,
boards of the same type should not take the same number. For example, there
should be only one Number 1 GMPU in a module.
z The boards of the same type are numbered sequentially in one module. For
example, if there are 6 BIEs in a BM, then their board numbers should be in the
sequence of 0 to 5 from left to right.z The boards whose slots are compatible to each other are numbered sequentially.
For example, in BM, the slots of GMEM, LPN7 and GLAP are compatible, so
they are regarded as of the same type and are numbered sequentially.
z In the frames such as the main control frame, interface frame and clock frame,
the board number has a fixed correspondence with the slot number. Assume all
the slots are inserted with corresponding boards, i.e., under the full configuration
of the frame, number these boards in the way described above. You can get a
board number for each board in each slot. The board number for a certain board
in a certain slot is then fixed. This numbering way is applicable to GLAP, LPN7
and GMEM.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 231/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-5
z In BM, FTC and BIE are numbered sequentially and the MSM board is numbered
separately.
z The GALM in AM/CM is numbered permanently as 0 and the GALM in BM is
numbered permanently as 1.
B.1.3 AM/CM Data Configuration
I. AM/CM composition
The standard configuration of AM/CM is shown in Figure B-4.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 88 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 189 20 21 22 23 24 2519
0 1
0101234567890
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 10 12 14
0 1
17 18 19 20 21 22 2316
24 26 28 30
BAM
0
1
2
3
4
5
P
W
CKC
S
G
KC
S
G
KC
S
P
W
C
P
W
C
P
W
C
P
W
C
P
W
C
P
W
C
P
W
C
G
L A
M
G
CM
C
G
CM
C
G
CM
C
G
CM
C
G
CM
C
G
CM
C
G
CM
C
G
CM
C
G
CM
C
G
NS
T
G
NS
T
3E
M3E
M3E
M3E
M3E
M3E
M3E
M3E
M3E
M3E
M3E
M3E
M3E
M3E
M3E
M
G
BF
I
G
BF
I
G
BF
I
G
BF
I
G
BF
I
G
BF
I
G
BF
I
G
BF
I
G
TC
N
P
W
C
G
TC
N
G
CM
C
3E
M
Figure B-4 The standard configuration of AM/CM
In the above figure, Frame 0 is BAM, Frame 2 and 3 are the transmission interface
frames, Frame 4 is the communication control frame and Frame 5 is the clock frame.
Configuration description:
1) GFBI works in load sharing mode.
2) GMCC 0 and GMCC 1 are used for accessing BAM, GSNT, GCTN and GALM,
so they must be configured. Other GMCCs are used to access BM.
II. AM/CM optical path configuration The distribution of AM/CM optical paths is illustrated in Figure B-5.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 232/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-6
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 88 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 189 20 21 22 23 24 2519
0
1
4
5
6
7
6
7
4
5
2
3
2
3
0
1
8
9
12
13
14
15
14
15
12
13
10
11
10
11
8
9
24
25
28
29
30
31
30
31
28
29
26
27
26
27
24
25
16
17
20
21
22
23
22
23
20
21
18
19
18
19
16
17
Figure B-5 AM/CM interface frame optical path distribution
The optical path number of FBC is fixedly determined by its slot. Each FBC has two
optical paths, the upper one is called X and the bottom one is called Y. The X opticalpaths of the two adjacent FBC boards are in active/standby relationship, so do the Y
optical paths of the two adjacent FBC boards. The optical paths between BM and
AM/CM work in load-sharing mode. See Figure B-6.
X
Y
X
Y
FBC
(2n)
FBC
(2n+2)
GOPT 0 GOPT 1
Figure B-6 Optical path distribution
In Figure B-6, n means the board number of FBC, 0<n<14.
III. The speech channel connection procedures in multi-module BSC
MSC←→FTC←→MSM←→E3M←→GCTN←→GFBI←→GOPT←→GNET←→BIE
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 233/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-7
IV. SS7 transmission procedures in multi-module BSC
MSC←→FTC←→MSM←→E3M←→Transparent transmission
BIE←→GNET←→LPN7←→GMPU
V. Inter-BM communication
BM1: GMPU←→GMC2←→GOPT←→GFBI←→GMCCS
BM2: GMPU←→GMC2←→GOPT←→GFBI←→GMCCS
B.1.4 BM Data Configuration
Single module BSC is seldom being used, so only the BM data configuration of
multi-module BSC is introduced here.
BM consists of 1 main control frame, 1 Base Station interface frame and 1~2 TCSM
unit frame.
I. Numbering of boards
Boards numbering and the full configuration of the frames will be described as follows
according to the numbering principles of boards as mentioned above.
1) Main control frame
The board configuration and numbering in the main control frame is shown in
Figure B-7.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 88 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 189 20 21 22 23 24 2519
0 1 2 3 4 5 0 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 1
6 7 88 109 5 6 7 8 90 1 0 11
0
P
W
C
P
WC
P
W
C
P
WC
GNOD
GNOD
GNOD
GNOD
GNOD
GNOD
GEM A
GNOD
GMPU
GM
PU
GN
OD
GN
OD
GN
OD
GN
OD
GN
OD
GNET
GNET
GMEM
LPN7
LPN7
GL AP
GL
AP
GL
AP
GL
AP
GL
AP
GL
AP
GMC2
GOPT
G ALM
GMC2
GOPT
Figure B-7 Board numbering in the main control frame
Base Station interface frame
The board configuration and numbering in the base station interface frame are shown
in Figure B-8.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 234/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-8
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 189 20 21 22 23 24 2519
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 88 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P
WC
P
WC
B
IE
B
IE
B
IE
B
IE
B
IE
B
IE
B
IE
B
IE
B
IE
B
IE
B
IE
B
IE
B
IE
B
IE
B
IE
B
IE
B
IE
B
IE
B
IE
Figure B-8 Board numbering in the base station interface frame
BIEs are numbered from 0 sequentially according to the actual number of boards
configured and its numbering has no relationship with their slots.
The two adjacent BIEs constitute an active/standby group that is numbered from 0.
The 16 BIE constitutes one group by itself, numbered as 8.
2) TCSM unit The full configuration of TCSM unit is illustrated in Figure B-9.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 189 20 21 22 23 24 25190 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P
W
S
F
T
C
F
T
C
F
T
C
F
T
C
F
T
C
F
T
C
F
T
C
F
T
C
F
T
C
F
T
C
F
T
C
F
T
C
F
T
C
F
T
C
F
T
C
F
T
C
P
W
S
M
S
M
M
S
M
M
S
M
M
S
M
Figure B-9 The full configuration of TCSM unit
FTCs are numbered according to the configuration status of BIEs and the following
principles.
FTC number = Number of HWs occupied by BIE.
For example, configure 2 BIE active/standby groups, each group occupies 8 HWs and
each FTC occupies 1 HW. In this case, the starting number of the FTC board = (8 %
2)/1 = 16 and the subsequent FTC can be numbered sequentially from 16.
The MSMs are numbered from 0 sequentially in BM.
Note:
For the number of occupied HWs, see II. Network Resource Allocation.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 235/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-9
II. Network Resource Allocation
The BSC system resources mainly include network resources and control resources.
Network resources are HW resources provided by the switching network board(GNET), including 128 HWs, each of which provides 32 timeslots.
The boards that occupy network resources are BIE equipment, signaling processing
board and inter-module circuit.
Each active/standby BIE group is allocated with 4 or 8 HWs depending on its
networking mode. And the number of HWs occupied by a group depends on the
actual cable distribution. FTC and MSM do not occupy HW resources in the system.
Of 128 HWs, 64 HWs are allocated permanently for system internal usage. The
signaling processing units LPN7, GLAP and GMEM occupy Number 53 to 62 HWs,as shown in Figure B-10. The numbers of HWs occupied by other boards are
determined by the slots where they are located.
15 16 17 18 2019
53 54 55 56
62 57 58 59 60
61
G
M
E
M
L
P
N
7
L
P
N
7
GL
A
P
GL
A
P
GL
A
P
GL
A
P
G
L
A
P
G
L
A
P
Figure B-10 HW allocation for signaling processing units
Number 48 HW and Number 71 are occupied permanently for fixed use and GALM
occupies Number 49 HW.
Several HWs constitute a HW group. For instance, the 8 HWs allocated to a BIE
active/standby group constitute a HW group. HW group numbers are presented in the
[Slot Description Table]. The corresponding relationship between HW group
numbers and HW numbers is given in the [HW Description Table].
III. Control Resource Allocation
Control resources refer to GNOD that is used by GMPU to control circuit boards such
as BIE. In BM, BIE communicates with GMPU via GNOD.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 236/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-10
The master node (NOD) is provided by GNOD. At most 11 GNODs can be configured
in a BM module. Each GNOD can provide 4 master nodes, i.e., each BM can provide
a maximum of 44 master nodes for communication with boards such as BIE, to
control their operations.
In BSC system, although the communication of GMEM, LPN7 and GLAP with GMPU
is achieved by means of memory switching, BSC takes each memory switching area
as a virtual master node. The virtual master nodes occupy node numbers ranging
from 44 to 53. For the distribution of master nodes, see Figure B-11.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 88 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 189 20 21 22 23 24 2519
0 1 2 3 4 5
6 7 88 109
0
1
23
4
5
67
8
9
1011
12
13
1415
16
17
1819
20
21
2223
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44 45 46 47
49 50 51 52
48
53
Figure B-11 Node resources distribution
One active/standby group of BIE shares one master node, whose number is
determined by physical cable distribution.
The maintenance of FTC and MSC is done through a timeslot in E1, so there is no
need to allocate nodes to them.
1) Master node description
For the frame length of read/write mailbox and the length of commands sent and
reported, it is advisable to refer to the fixed configuration as shown in Table B-1.
Table B-1 Description of master node
Board Type Frame Length of Read/Write Mailbox Length of Commands Reported or Sent
BIE 10 9
GLAP and LPN7 80 64
2) Slave node number
GMPU visits the equipment via the master node on GNOD. So the equipment visited
by GMPU can also be called as slave node. Communication between the master
nodes and slave nodes is implemented via serial ports. While the master nodes
communicates with the GMPU via the mailbox, for the master nodes collect
voluminous information of all its slave nodes. Each master node consists of several
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 237/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-11
slave nodes and each slave node is allocated with a serial number called slave node
number. The slave node number of LPN7 and GLAP is 0 and the slave node number
of BIE is the same as its board number. The number of the slave nodes in TCSM unit
is illustrated in Figure B-12.
12 3 4 5
F
T
C
F
T
C
F
T
C
F
T
C
M
S
M
Figure B-12 Number of slave nodes in TCSM unit
B.2 Clock Data Configuration
The BSC system adopts stratum-3 clock system. The working principle of the clock
system in multi-module BSC is shown in Figure B-13.
GOPT
GNET
BIE BIE
GMPU GMC2
BM
GCTN
Clcokframe
GSNT
GMCC
MCP
GALM
GFBI AM/CM
MSC reference source
BITS reference source
GPS reference source
Figure B-13 The working principle of the clock system in multi-module BSC
The working principle of the clock system in single-module BSC is shown in
Figure B-14.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 238/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-12
Clock Frame
MSC reference source
BITS reference source
GNET
BIE BIE
GMPU GMC2
GPS reference source
Figure B-14 The working principle of the clock system in single-module BSC
For the multi-module BSC, what connects the MSC is E3M located at the AM/CM
transmission interface frame. E3M extracts the 8kHz clock information from the
superior MSC transmission line, and transmits it to the 8K-in port on the motherboard
of the clock frame through the clock cables on the motherboard (C821CKB).
C821CKB also provides 2Mbit/s and 2MHz input ports used to connect the GPS and
BITS. The BSC usually extracts the 8kHz signal from the signals of the superior MSC,
and it seldom extracts clock information of higher precision directly from the GPS and
BITS.
The clock frame is composed of GCKS and PWC. GCKS extracts the 8kHz signal
(differential signal) from the trunk or 2Mbit/s and 2MHz signals from other equipment
(like the BITS) as its reference clock source.
Each reference clock source has two optional signals. The major function of GCKS is
to capture and trace the reference clock source so that the clock signals output from
GCKS have the same frequency and phase features as the reference clock source.
GCKS provides the clock signals for the BSC, and 2 8kHz and 2 standard 2Mbit/s and
2MHz reference sources, which can also meet the requirement of the stratum-2 A and
stratum-3 clocks.
The clock frame is equipped on AM/CM in a multi-module BSC system, and the BM
obtains the clock synchronization information provided by the clock frame on the
AM/CM through the inter-module optical paths.
B.3 Trunk and Signaling on the A-interface
A-interface is the communication interface between NSS and BSS, that is, the
interconnecting interface between MSC and BSC. Its physical link, which is based on
standard 2.048Mbit/s PCM digital transmission, transmits information concerning
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 239/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-13
mobile station management, BTS management, mobility management and
connection management.
There are two kinds of trunk circuits on the A-interface:
z A-interface traffic link (voice)
z A-interface signaling link (SS7 link)
As the service information at the NSS side and BSS side is processed at different
rates, code conversion and rate adaptation (TRAU, abbreviated as FTC) are required
to convert the 16kbit/s service signals at the BSS side into 64kbit/s signals at the NSS
side when voice and data services are transmitted between NSS and BSS. Normally
FTC is placed at MSC side to achieve multiplexing of the 16kbit/s signals between
NSS and BSS so that the number of E1s on the A-interface can be reduced. E3M and
MSM are respectively used for BSC and MSC to complete multiplexing and
de-multiplexing function. For the signal flow, see Figure B-15.
A TCSM unit contains 1 MSM and 4 FTCs.
In a multi-module BSC, AM/CM manages E3M, through which the BM manages
TCSM unit. One E3M can be connected to 4 TCSM units at most. The transparent
transmission BIE accomplishes the transparent transmission of signaling on
A-interface.
Each E3M provides 5 E1 ports, the first 4 of which can interconnect with 4 TCSM
units and the fifth of which is connected to the transparent transmission BIE to
accomplish the transparent transmission of SS7 (the processing of SS7 is performed
in the BM). One TCSM unit can convert the 64kbit/s signals from the MSC side after
FTC code conversion, and then multiplex the 4 E1s to 1 E1 via MSM for transmission.
E3M
TCSM
To MSC
To TCSM
To Transparent Transm ission
BIE(SS7 Signaling)
To BM
A In terface
Asu b In te rface
Figure B-15 A-interface signal flow
As shown in the Figure B-15, the interface between E3M and TCSM is called as Asub
Interface and that between the TCSM unit and MSC is called as A-interface.
If the No. 16 timeslot is used to transfer signaling at E1, the timeslot allocation at
Asub interface and A-interface see respectively in Table B-2, Table B-3.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 240/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-14
Table B-2 Timeslot allocation at A-interface
bit
TS0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 TS01 ~ 15 15 full rate channels
16 SS7 (Signaling System Number 7)
17 ~ 31 15 full rate channels
Table B-3 Timeslot allocation at Asub interface
bit
TS0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 TS0
1 ~ 15 A1 ~ A15 B1 ~ B15 C1 ~ C15 D1 ~ D15
16 SS7
17 ~ 31 A17 ~ A31 B17 ~ B31 C17 ~ C31 D17 ~ D31
Note:
The A-interface data configuration described in this chapter includes the data configuration of both Asub
and A-interface.
B.4 BTS Networking
BSC and BTS are connected through the Base station Interface Equipment (BIE).
BIE accomplishes functions of multiplexing/de-multiplexing, level conversion from HW
to E1 and extraction of synchronization clocks, etc.
BTS networking modes include star networking, chain networking and tree
networking.
B.4.1 Principle of Numbering
I. Numbering of sites
The sites in a BM are numbered sequentially from 0 to 63.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 241/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-15
II. Numbering of TRXs
The TRXs in a site are numbered sequentially from 0 to 35. Its slot determines the
number of TRXs.
III. Numbering of channels
The physical channels of a TRX are numbered sequentially from 0 to 7.
IV. Numbering of trunk groups
Trunk group is the set of a cluster of connatural trunk circuits. The trunks connected
to BIE constitute one group and those connected to FTC constitute another group.
The trunk groups in an office are numbered sequentially. For example, the circuits
from BSC to MSC via FTC are grouped as group 0, while the trunk circuits from BSC
to BTS and to transparent transmission BIE are grouped as group 1.
Note:
Though the trunk circuits at Abis interface are connected to different BTSs, they are still regarded
belonging to the same trunk group.
V. Numbering of trunk circuits
Trunk circuits refer to all HW timeslots allocated by GNET, and are numbered
sequentially in a BM. Timeslot number on BS1 Interface refer to all HW timeslots
allocated to a BIE group, are numbered sequentially.
The calculation formula is given as follows:
The initial trunk circuit number of the BIE active/standby group = Number the
active/standby group% 256 (8 HWs, each of which provides 32 time slots)
For example, the trunk circuit Number of active/standby group 0 is 0~255, that of
active/standby group 1 is 256 ~ 511, and that of active/standby group 2 is 512~767
etc.
Note:
Active/standby group 7 and 8 respectively occupies 4 HWs, so they should be numbered as exceptions.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 242/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-16
B.4.2 Introduction to BIE
I. Functions
In GSM system, BIE is adopted to connect BSC with BTS, as shown in Figure B-16.
TMU BIE
AbisInterface
BS Interface
E1 HW
GNET
BTS BSC
Figure B-16 BIE in GSM system
Each BIE can provide 6 E1 ports at the maximum and at BTS side each TMU can
provide at most 4 E1 ports (If it is BTS20, at most 4 E1 ports can be provided by BIE
or BSMU).
1) BTS312 can be configured with 3 cabinet groups at the maximum, among which,
z 1 main cabinet group. In this main cabinet group, 1 master cabinet (including 2
TMUs) and 1 slave cabinet (no TMU) are configured.
z 2 extension cabinet group. In each extension cabinet group, 1 master cabinet
(including 1 TMU) and 1 slave cabinet (no TMU) are configured.
2) BTS30 can be configured with 3 cabinet groups at the maximum, among which,
z 1 main cabinet group. In this main cabinet group, 1 master cabinet (including 2
TMUs) and 2 slave cabinet (no TMU) are configured.
z 2 extension cabinet group. In each extension cabinet group, 1 master cabinet
(including 1 TMU) and 2 slave cabinet (no TMU) are configured.
In BM, the voice and signaling information from GNET are sent to BIE through BS
interface (HW). After multiplexing, they are sent to corresponding BTS via Abis
interface (E1). Information from BTS are sent to GNET after de-multiplexing. SeeFigure B-17. Each BIE group can support 8 HWs at the maximum, among which 4
HWs form one group. The trunk circuits are numbered continuously and sequentially
from 0 to 127.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 243/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-17
B
I
E
BS1
E1HW
Abis
Figure B-17 BIE multiplexing/de-multiplexing
II. BIE trunk mode
Table B-4 BIE trunk mode
BIE trunk mode Networkingmode supported
Maximum number of sites (S) andTRXs (T) supported at each port
BIE typesupported
6E1 port*2TRX/port Star networking 1S-2TGM32BIE0GM32BIE1
4E1 port*6TRX/port Star networking 1S-6TGM32BIE0GM32BIE1
2E1port*64K LAPD/portChain networkingTree networking
1S-10T, 4S-9T, 7S-8T GM32BIE0
2E1port*32KLAPD multiplexmode/port
Chain networkingTree networking
1S-12T, 5S-10T GM32BIE0
2E1port*multiplex/portChain networkingTree networking
1S-15T(12SI), 2S-15T(16SI, BTS20don't support), 2S-14T(4SI),4S-14T(8SI, BTS20 don't support),4S-13T, 5S-13T(BTS20 don'tsupport)
GM32BIE1
6E1port (support 16K)Chain networkingand treenetworking
2S-2T GM32BIE1
4E1port (supports 16K)Chain networkingand treenetworking
7S-7T GM32BIE1
6E1port*2TRX/port (supportlink)
Tree networking 2S-2TGM32BIE0GM32BIE1
4E1port*6TRX/port (supportlink)
Tree networking 6S-6TGM32BIE0GM32BIE1
Sim 12:1Chain networkingand tree
networking
1S-12T, 5S-10T GM32BIE1
Sim10:1Chain networkingand treenetworking
1S-10T, 4S-9T, 7S-8T GM32BIE1
6 E1 Port half rate topologyChain networkingTree networkging
7S-15T GM34BIE
Full rate ring topology Ring 5S-15T GM34BIEHalf rate ring topology Ring 5S-15T GM34BIE
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 244/283
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 245/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-19
8 HWs correspond to 4 E1 ports, among which, HW0 ~HW3 are multiplexed to
port0~port1 and HW4~HW7 are multiplexed to port2~port3. Signaling timeslots are
distributed in trunk circuits 96 ~ 127 (224~255), and then they are switched to the
timeslots 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18 and 31 of the two E1s. See Table B-5 for timeslotsswitching relationship.
Table B-5 4-port star networking timeslots switching relationship
TS Port0 Port1 Port2 Port3
3 96 102 224 230
6 97 103 225 231
9 98 104 226 232
12 99 105 227 233
15 100 106 228 23418 101 107 229 235
31 127 125 255 253
Idle TSs are allocated according to TS sequence. For timeslot allocation is fixed, each
port can only be allocated with 10 idle timeslots at most, i.e., the TS 4, 5, 7, 8, 10, 11,
13, 14, 16 and 17 of each port are idle TS.
The timeslot allocation of the 4 E1 ports at Abis interface is the same, as shown in
Table B-6. In this table, T means TRX, C means Channel. For example, T0C1 means
channel1 of TRX0.
Table B-6 Abis interface timeslots distribution under 4-port star networking mode
bit
TS
01 23 45 67
0
1 T0C0 T0C1 T0C2 T0C3
2 T0C4 T0C5 T0C6 T0C7
3 FUL1
4 T1C0 T1C1 T1C2 T1C3
5 T1C4 T1C5 T1C6 T1C7
6 FUL2
7 T2C0 T2C1 T2C2 T2C3
8 T2C4 T2C5 T2C6 T2C7
9 FUL3
10 T3C0 T3C1 T3C2 T3C311 T3C4 T3C5 T3C6 T3C7
12 FUL4
13 T4C0 T4C1 T4C2 T4C3
14 T4C4 T4C5 T4C6 T4C715 FUL5
16 T5C0 T5C1 T5C2 T5C3
17 T5C4 T5C5 T5C6 T5C7
18 FUL6
19~30
31 OML
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 246/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-20
The timeslots distribution of the two HW groups at BS interface is the same. The
timeslots distribution ofHW0 ~ HW3 is illustrated in Table B-7. In this table, S means
Site, T means TRX and C means Channel. For example, S1T2C1 means Channel1 of
TRX2 in Site1.
Table B-7 4-port star networking BS interface HW timeslots distribution (with 64kbit/s full rate)
bit
TS
01 234567 01 234567 01 234567 01234567
0 S0T0C0 S0T4C0 S1T2C0 S0T0FUL
1 S0T0C1 S0T4C1 S1T2C1 S0T1FUL
2 S0T0C2 S0T4C2 S1T2C2 S0T2FUL
3 S0T0C3 S0T4C3 S1T2C3 S0T3FUL
4 S0T0C4 S0T4C4 S1T2C4 S0T4FUL5 S0T0C5 S0T4C5 S1T2C5 S0T5FUL
6 S0T0C6 S0T4C6 S1T2C6 S1T0FUL
7 S0T0C7 S0T4C7 S1T2C7 S1T1FUL8 S0T1C0 S0T5C0 S1T3C0 S1T2FUL
9 S0T1C1 S0T5C1 S1T3C1 S1T3FUL
10 S0T1C2 S0T5C2 S1T3C2 S1T4FUL
11 S0T1C3 S0T5C3 S1T3C3 S1T5FUL12 S0T1C4 S0T5C4 S1T3C4
13 S0T1C5 S0T5C5 S1T3C5
14 S0T1C6 S0T5C6 S1T3C6
15 S0T1C7 S0T5C7 S1T3C7
16 S0T2C0 S1T0C0 S1T4C0
17 S0T2C1 S1T0C1 S1T4C118 S0T2C2 S1T0C2 S1T4C2
19 S0T2C3 S1T0C3 S1T4C3
20 S0T2C4 S1T0C4 S1T4C4
21 S0T2C5 S1T0C5 S1T4C522 S0T2C6 S1T0C6 S1T4C6
23 S0T2C7 S1T0C7 S1T4C7
24 S0T3C0 S1T1C0 S1T5C0
25 S0T3C1 S1T1C1 S1T5C1
26 S0T3C2 S1T1C2 S1T5C2
27 S0T3C3 S1T1C3 S1T5C3
28 S0T3C4 S1T1C4 S1T5C4
29 S0T3C5 S1T1C5 S1T5C5 OML1
30 S0T3C6 S1T1C6 S1T5C6
31 S0T3C7 S1T1C7 S1T5C7 OML0
HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3
II. 6E1port*2TRX/port
6 E1 port * 2TRX/port, abbreviated as 6-port star networking, as shown in
Figure B-20.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 247/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-21
SITE0
SITE1
SITE2
SITE3
SITE4
SITE5
BIE0
1
2
3
4
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3
Abis
5
Figure B-20 6-port star networking
Under this networking mode, the capacity of each E1 port is 2 TRXs and the rate of
LAPD is 64kbit/s. It does not support chain connection or multi-chain networking.
Each BIE occupies only 4 HWs, HW0 ~ HW3, which are multiplexed to port0~port5.
Signaling timeslots are distributed in the trunk circuits 96~127, which are switched to
the TS3, TS6 and TS31 of the 6 E1s. The timeslot switching relationship is illustrated
in Table 8-5.
Table B-8 6-port star networking TS switching relationship
TS Port0 Port1 Port2 Port3 Port4 Port5
3 96 98 100 102 104 1066 97 99 101 103 105 107
31 127 125 123 121 119 117
Idle TSs are allocated according to TS sequence. For timeslot allocation is fixed, each
port can only be allocated with up to 2 idle timeslots, i.e. TS 4 and TS 5 are idle TSs.
The timeslot allocation of the 6 E1 ports at Abis interface is the same, as shown in
Table B-9. In this table, T means TRX, C means Channel. For example, T0C1 means
channel1 of TRX0.
Table B-9 6-port star networking Abis interface timeslots distribution
bit
TS
01 23 45 67
0
1 T0C0 T0C1 T0C2 T0C3
2 T0C4 T0C5 T0C6 T0C7
3 FUL1
4 T1C0 T1C1 T1C2 T1C3
5 T1C4 T1C5 T1C6 T1C7
6 FUL2
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 248/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-22
bit
TS
01 23 45 67
7~30
31 OML
The timeslots of the HWs at BS interface are distributed as illustrated in Table B-10.
In this table, S means Site, T means TRX and C means Channel. For example,
S2T0C0 means Channel0 of TRX0 in Site2.
Table B-10 6port star networking BS interface HW timeslots distribution (with 64kbit/s full rate)
bit
TS
01 234567 01 234567 01 234567 01234567
0 S0T0C0 S2T0C0 S4T0C0 S0T0FUL1 S0T0C1 S2T0C1 S4T0C1 S0T1FUL
2 S0T0C2 S2T0C2 S4T0C2 S1T0FUL
3 S0T0C3 S2T0C3 S4T0C3 S1T1FUL
4 S0T0C4 S2T0C4 S4T0C4 S2T0FUL
5 S0T0C5 S2T0C5 S4T0C5 S2T1FUL
6 S0T0C6 S2T0C6 S4T0C6 S3T0FUL
7 S0T0C7 S2T0C7 S4T0C7 S3T1FUL
8 S0T1C0 S2T1C0 S4T1C0 S4T0FUL
9 S0T1C1 S2T1C1 S4T1C1 S4T1FUL
10 S0T1C2 S2T1C2 S4T1C2 S5T0FUL
11 S0T1C3 S2T1C3 S4T1C3 S5T1FUL
12 S0T1C4 S2T1C4 S4T1C4
13 S0T1C5 S2T1C5 S4T1C514 S0T1C6 S2T1C6 S4T1C6
15 S0T1C7 S2T1C7 S4T1C716 S1T0C0 S3T0C0 S5T0C0
17 S1T0C1 S3T0C1 S5T0C1
18 S1T0C2 S3T0C2 S5T0C2
19 S1T0C3 S3T0C3 S5T0C320 S1T0C4 S3T0C4 S5T0C4
21 S1T0C5 S3T0C5 S5T0C5 OML5
22 S1T0C6 S3T0C6 S5T0C6
23 S1T0C7 S3T0C7 S5T0C7 OML4
24 S1T1C0 S3T1C0 S5T1C0
25 S1T1C1 S3T1C1 S5T1C1 OML3
26 S1T1C2 S3T1C2 S5T1C227 S1T1C3 S3T1C3 S5T1C3 OML2
28 S1T1C4 S3T1C4 S5T1C4
29 S1T1C5 S3T1C5 S5T1C5 OML130 S1T1C6 S3T1C6 S5T1C6
31 S1T1C7 S3T1C7 S5T1C7 OML0
HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3
B.4.4 Chain Networking
Chain networking is illustrated in Figure B-21.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 249/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-23
BSC BTS0 BTS1 BTS2
Figure B-21 Chain networking
For chain networking or star networking with the number of TRXs for each BTS is
more than 6, data are configured the same as that for chain networking. Four
scenarios are described for the data configuration of chain networking.
1) If 10:1 mode is adopted, when the total number of TRXs on the chain is no more
than 10 (called as single chain), one E1 can be led out respectively from port0
and port2 of the BIE, then connected respectively to the TMUs of BTS. Thus, two
single chains can be formed. See Figure B-22.
2) If 10:1 mode is adopted, when the total number of TRXs on the chain is greater
than 10 (called as dual chain), the number of TRXs in all levels of BTSs is so
great that one E1 cannot bear all of them in chain connection. In this scenario,
one E1 can be led out from port0 and port2 of the BIE, and then connected to
the port0 and port1 on the TMU of the first level of BTS. Thus, a dual chain can
be formed to meet the capacity requirement. See Figure B-23.
3) If 12:1 mode is adopted, when the total number of TRXs on the chain is no
greater than 12, single chain connection is adopted. But when the total number
of TRXs on the chain is greater than 12, dual chain connection is adopted.
4) If 15:1 mode is adopted, when the total number of TRXs on the chain is no
greater than 15, single chain connection is adopted. But when the total number of TRXs on the chain is greater than 15, dual chain connection is adopted.
TMU
E1 port0
E1 port2
BIE
HW0~HW3
HW4~HW7
SITE0
SITE0
SITEm
SITEn
Figure B-22 Single chain connection
TMU
E1 port0
E1 port2
BIE
HW0~HW3
HW4~HW7
SITE0 SITEm
0
1
2
3
0
1
Figure B-23 Dual chain connection
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 250/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-24
Chain networking supports 5 trunk mode, 2E1port * full rate 64K LPAD/port, 2E1port *
half rate 64K LPAD/port, 2E1port*15:1 multiplexing/port, simulating 12:1 and
simulating 10:1.
I. 2E1port* 64K LPAD/port trunk mode
2E1port* full rate 64K LPAD/port trunk mode is shortened as 10:1 chain configuration.
Under this networking mode, the capacity of each E1 port is 10 TRXs and the rate of
LAPD is 64kbit/s. It supports chain connection and multi-chain networking. The port0
and port 2 of each BIE is valid for traffic, corresponding to 8 HWs. Among the 8 HWs,
HW0~HW3 are multiplexed to port0 and HW4~HW7 to port2.
Signaling timeslots are distributed in the trunk circuits 96 ~ 127 (224 ~ 255), which
are switched to the 11 signaling timeslots TS3, TS6 … and TS31 of the 2 E1s. The
timeslot switching relationship is illustrated in Table B-11.
Table B-11 10:1chain networking TS switching relationship
TS Port0 Port2
3 96 224
6 97 225
9 98 22612 99 227
15 100 228
18 101 229
21 102 230
24 103 231
27 104 232
30 105 23331 127 255
The configuration of idle timeslots is described as follows.
z When there is no cascading, idle TSs are allocated according to TS sequence.
For timeslot allocation is fixed, each port can only be allocated with 18 idle
timeslots at most, i.e., the TS 4, 5, 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, 14, 16, 17, 19, 20, 22, 23, 25,
26, 28 and 29 are idle TS.
z When there is cascading, the timeslot allocation of the first level of sites follows
the allocation principle under the case when there is no cascading. From the
second level of sites, the idle TSs allocation after being switched must follow the
allocation principle of the first level of sites.
When 2-port 64kbit/s LAPD rate is taken for site cascading, the number of TRXs
supported is reduced by 1 as the number of sites cascaded increases by 1, because
the signaling timeslots of different sites cannot be multiplexed. The timeslots
distribution at Abis interface is shown in Table B-12.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 251/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-25
Table B-12 2-port 10:1chain networking Abis interface TS distribution
bit
TS01234567
0 Synchronization TS
1 TRX0 traffic TS
2 TRX0 traffic TS
3 RSL0
4 TRX1 traffic TS
5 TRX1 traffic TS6 RSL1
7 TRX2 traffic TS
8 TRX2 traffic TS
9 RSL2
10 TRX3 traffic TS
11 TRX3 traffic TS12 RSL3
13 TRX4 traffic TS
14 TRX4 traffic TS15 RSL4
16 TRX5 traffic TS
17 TRX5 traffic TS
18 RSL519 TRX6 traffic TS
20 TRX6 traffic TS
21 RSL6
22 TRX7 traffic TS
23 TRX7 traffic TS
24 RSL7
25 TRX8 traffic TS
26 TRX8 traffic TS
27 RSL8
28 TRX9 traffic TS29 TRX9 traffic TS
30 RSL9
31 OML
The TS distribution of the two HW groups at BS interface is the same. See Table B-13
for the TS distribution of HW0~HW3. In this table, T means TRX and C means
Channel. For example, T4C2 means Channel2 of TRX4.
Table B-13 2-port 10:1chain networking BS interface HW TS distribution
bit
TS01 234567 01 234567 01 234567 01234567
0 T0C0 T4C0 T8C0 T0FUL
1 T0C1 T4C1 T8C1 T1FUL
2 T0C2 T4C2 T8C2 T2FUL
3 T0C3 T4C3 T8C3 T3FUL
4 T0C4 T4C4 T8C4 T4FUL5 T0C5 T4C5 T8C5 T5FUL
6 T0C6 T4C6 T8C6 T6FUL
7 T0C7 T4C7 T8C7 T7FUL
8 T1C0 T5C0 T9C0 T8FUL
9 T1C1 T5C1 T9C1 T9FUL
10 T1C2 T5C2 T9C2
11 T1C3 T5C3 T9C3
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 252/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-26
bit
TS01 234567 01 234567 01 234567 01234567
12 T1C4 T5C4 T9C4
13 T1C5 T5C5 T9C5
14 T1C6 T5C6 T9C615 T1C7 T5C7 T9C716 T2C0 T6C0
17 T2C1 T6C1
18 T2C2 T6C2
19 T2C3 T6C3
20 T2C4 T6C4
21 T2C5 T6C5
22 T2C6 T6C6
23 T2C7 T6C7
24 T3C0 T7C0
25 T3C1 T7C1
26 T3C2 T7C2
27 T3C3 T7C3
28 T3C4 T7C429 T3C5 T7C5
30 T3C6 T7C6
31 T3C7 T7C7 OML0
HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3
Data configuration principle under 10:1 mode is described as follows.
z The OML of each level of sites must be allocated to the 31st
TS of the incoming
E1 in its local site (achieved by the TS switching of the superior sites). The TEI of
the OML must be configured as the minimum value among all the TEI of the
signaling link in the same TS with the rate 64kbit/s. It is recommended that the
TEI be configured as 0.
z The sub-TS number is configured as 255 in Signaling Channel Connection
Table.
z The signaling TSs of different sites (including OML and RSL) cannot be allocated
to the same TS.
z Only the TCHs of the same sites can be configured to the same 64kbit/s TS.
z For dual-chain networking, the traffic TS and signaling TS of the same TRX must
be allocated to the same port, and they cannot be allocated to two different port.
z For BTS30 and BTS312, though many combined cabinet groups belong to the
same site (require only one OML), the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of different
cabinet groups cannot be multiplexed, i.e., the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of
different cabinet groups are taken on as TSs of different sites.
II. 2 E1 port * 32K LPAD Multiplex Mode/port
2E1 port * half rate 64K LPAD/port is shortened as 12:1 chain configuration. Under
this networking mode, the capacity of each E1 port is 12 TRX and the LAPD rate is
32kbit/s. It supports chain connection and multi-chain networking. The port 0 and port
2 of each BIE are valid for service, corresponding to 8 HWs, among which,
HW0~HW3 are multiplexed to port0 and HW4~HW7 are multiplexed to port2.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 253/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-27
The two adjacent RSLs of the same site share one TS on the E1. But two RSLs of
different sites cannot share TS, for the cabinet groups combined are taken on as
different sites.
Signaling timeslots are distributed in the trunk circuits 96~127 (224~255), which are
switched to the 7 signaling timeslots TS3, TS8, TS13 … and TS31 of the 2 E1s. The
timeslot switching relationship is illustrated in Table B-14.
Table B-14 10:1chain networking TS switching relationship
TS Port0 Port2
3 96 224
8 98 226
13 100 228
18 102 230
23 104 232
28 106 23431 127 255
The configuration of idle timeslots is described as follows.
z When there is no cascading, idle TSs are allocated according to TS sequence.
For timeslot allocation is fixed, each port can only be allocated with up to 22 idle
timeslots, i.e. the TSs 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 15, 16, 17, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24,
25, 26, 27, 29 and 30 are idle TSs.
z When there is cascading, the timeslot allocation of the first level of sites follows
the allocation principle under the case when there is no cascading. From the
second level of sites, the idle TSs allocation after being switched must follow the
allocation principle of the first level of sites.
When 2-port 32kbit/s LAPD rate is taken for site cascading, the number of TRXs
supported is reduced by 2 as the number of sites cascaded increases by 1, because
the signaling timeslots of different sites cannot be multiplexed. The timeslot
distribution at Abis interface is shown in Table B-15.
Table B-15 2-port 12:1chain networking Abis interface timeslots distribution
bit
TS01234567
0 Synchronization TS1 TRX0 traffic TS
2 TRX0 traffic TS
3 RSL0+RSL1
4 TRX1 traffic TS
5 TRX1 traffic TS
6 TRX2 traffic TS
7 TRX2 traffic TS8 RSL2+ RSL3
9 TRX3 traffic TS
10 TRX3 traffic TS
11 TRX4 traffic TS
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 254/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-28
bit
TS01234567
12 TRX4 traffic TS
13 RSL4+ RSL5
14 TRX5 traffic TS15 TRX5 traffic TS16 TRX6 traffic TS
17 TRX6 traffic TS
18 RSL6+RSL7
19 TRX7 traffic TS
20 TRX7 traffic TS
21 TRX8 traffic TS
22 TRX8 traffic TS
23 RSL8+RSL9
24 TRX9 traffic TS
25 TRX9 traffic TS
26 TRX10 traffic TS
27 TRX10 traffic TS
28 RSL10+RSL1129 TRX11 traffic TS
30 TRX11 traffic TS
31 OML
The TS distribution of the two HW groups at BS interface is the same. See Table 8-13
for the TS distribution of HW0~HW3. In this table, T means TRX and C means
Channel. For example, T4C2 means Channel2 of TRX4.
Table B-16 2-port 12:1chain networking BS interface HW TS distribution
bit
TS01 234567 01 234567 01 234567 01234567
0 T0C0 T4C0 T8C0 T0FUL, T1FUL
1 T0C1 T4C1 T8C12 T0C2 T4C2 T8C2 T2FUL, T3FUL
3 T0C3 T4C3 T8C3
4 T0C4 T4C4 T8C4 T4FUL, T5FUL
5 T0C5 T4C5 T8C5
6 T0C6 T4C6 T8C6 T6FUL, T7FUL
7 T0C7 T4C7 T8C7
8 T1C0 T5C0 T9C0 T8FUL, T9FUL9 T1C1 T5C1 T9C1
10 T1C2 T5C2 T9C2 T10FUL, T11FUL
11 T1C3 T5C3 T9C312 T1C4 T5C4 T9C4
13 T1C5 T5C5 T9C5
14 T1C6 T5C6 T9C6
15 T1C7 T5C7 T9C7
16 T2C0 T6C0 T10C0
17 T2C1 T6C1 T10C1
18 T2C2 T6C2 T10C2
19 T2C3 T6C3 T10C3
20 T2C4 T6C4 T10C4
21 T2C5 T6C5 T10C5
22 T2C6 T6C6 T10C6
23 T2C7 T6C7 T10C7
24 T3C0 T7C0 T11C0
25 T3C1 T7C1 T11C1
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 255/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-29
bit
TS01 234567 01 234567 01 234567 01234567
26 T3C2 T7C2 T11C2
27 T3C3 T7C3 T11C3
28 T3C4 T7C4 T11C429 T3C5 T7C5 T11C530 T3C6 T7C6 T11C6
31 T3C7 T7C7 T11C7 OML0
HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3
Data configuration principle under 12:1 mode is described as follows.
z The OML of each level of sites must be allocated to the 31st
TS of the incoming
E1 in its local site (achieved by the TS switching of the superior sites). The TEI of
the OML must be configured as the minimum value among all the TEI of the
signaling link in the same TS with rate 64kbit/s. It is recommended that the TEIbe configured as 0.
z The sub-TS number is configured as 32 or 33 in Signaling Channel Connection
Table according to actual practice.
For BTS30 and BTS312, though many combined cabinet groups belong to the
same site (require only one OML), the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of different
cabinet groups cannot be multiplexed, i.e., the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of
different cabinet groups are taken on as TSs of different sites.
z For BTS20 under 12:1 mode, the RSL of TRX0 can only be multiplexed with the
RSL of TRX1 to the same 64kbit/s TS, and the RSL of TRX2 can only bemultiplexed with the RSL of TRX3 to the same 64kbit/s TS and so on. The same
principle is applicable to the RSL of other TRXs.
z The signaling TSs of different sites (including OML and RSL) cannot be allocated
to the same TS.
z Only the TCHs of the same site can be configured to the same 64kbit/s TS.
z For dual-chain networking, the traffic TS and signaling TS of the same TRX must
be allocated to the same port, and they cannot be allocated to two different ports.
For BTS30 and BTS312, the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of different cabinet groups
cannot be multiplexed, for the cabinet groups combined are taken on as different sites,
though they actually belong to the same site (they require only one OML).
III. 6 E1 Ports (Supporting 16K)
In the original networking mode, RSL and OML occupy 8 bits of each byte in the
64kbit/s E1 timeslot. In the 16K networking mode, the same as TCH, the RSL and
OML only occupy 2 bits of each byte, i.e. 16kbit/s transmission bandwidth resources.
The 16K networking saves E1 transmission (timeslot) resources on the Abis interface,
especially, the transmission cost when there are not much TRXs in the BTS. When
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 256/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-30
satellite transmission is adopted on the Abis interface, the expensive fee for the
leased satellite circuit can be saved.
For a group of BIE boards, 6 E1 ports are available, and 4 HWs are allocated
accordingly. The distribution of the timeslots corresponding to HW0~HW3 on the BS
interface is shown in Table B-17.
Table B-17 HW timeslot distribution on the BS interface in 6-E1 port 16K networking mode
bit
TS01 234567 01 234567 01 234567 01 234567
0 1C1 2C1 3C1
1 1C2 2C2 3C2
2 1C3 2C3 3C3
3 1C4 2C4 3C4
4 1C5 2C5 3C5
5 1C6 2C6 3C66 1C7 2C7 3C77 1C8 2C8 3C8
8 1C9 2C9 3C9 4C9
9 1C10 2C10 3C10 4C10
10 1C11 2C11 3C11 4C11
11 1C12 2C12 3C12 4C12
12 1C13 2C13 3C13 4C1313 1C14 2C14 3C14 4C14
14 1C15 2C15 3C15 4C15
15 1C16 2C16 3C16 4C16
16 1C17 2C17 3C17 4C17
17 1C18 2C18 3C18 4C18
18 1C19 2C19 3C19 4C19
19 1C20 2C20 3C20 4C2020 1C21 2C21 3C21 4C21
21 1C22 2C22 3C22 4C22
22 1C23 2C23 3C23 4C23
23 1C24 2C24 3C24 4C24
24 1C25 2C25 3C25 4C25
25 1C26 2C26 3C26 4C2626 1C27 2C27 3C27 4C27
27 1C28 2C28 3C28 4C28
28 1C29 2C29 3C29 4C29
29 1C30 2C30 3C30 4C30
30 1C31 2C31 3C31 4C31
31 1C32 2C32 3C32 4C32
HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3
In the 4-E1 port * 16K signaling link networking mode, a BIE board occupies 4 HWs
(HW0~HW3). The timeslots of HW0~HW2 are respectively switched to TS1 and TS2,
and TS4 and TS5 of E1(0) ~ E1(5). This is the same as the original 6*E1 port star
networking mode.
Timeslot combination of HW3: The latter 24 16K timeslots are combined into 6 64K
timeslots, which can be understood as the OML timeslots in the original star
networking mode. Actually the 24 16K timeslots can be used for TCH. The 6
combined timeslots are respectively allocated to E1(0) ~ E1(5) of TS31.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 257/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-31
The timeslot distribution on the Abis interface in 6-E1 port 16K networking mode is
shown in Table B-18.
Table B-18 Timeslot distribution on the Abis interface in 6-E1 port * 16K networking mode
E1(0) E1(1)
0
1 1C1 1C2 1C3 1C4 1C17 1C18 1C19 1C20
2 1C5 1C6 1C7 1C8 1C21 1C22 1C23 1C24
3
4 1C9 1C10 1C11 1C12 1C25 1C26 1C27 1C28
5 1C13 1C14 1C15 1C16 1C29 1C30 1C31 1C32
6
7
…
…
26
27
28
29
30
31 4C29 4C30 4C31 4C32 4C25 4C26 4C27 4C28
E1(2) E1(3)
0
1 2C1 2C2 2C3 2C4 2C17 2C18 2C19 2C202 2C5 2C6 2C7 2C8 2C21 2C22 2C23 2C24
3
4 2C9 2C10 2C11 2C12 2C25 2C26 2C27 2C28
5 2C13 2C14 2C15 2C16 2C29 2C30 2C31 2C32
6
7
…
…
26
27
28
2930
31 4C21 4C22 4C23 4C24 4C17 4C18 4C19 4C20
E1(4) E1(5)
0
1 3C1 3C2 3C3 3C4 3C17 3C18 3C19 3C20
2 3C5 3C6 3C7 3C8 3C21 3C22 3C23 3C243
4 3C9 3C10 3C11 3C12 3C25 3C26 3C27 3C28
5 3C13 3C14 3C15 3C16 3C29 3C30 3C31 3C32
6
7
…
…
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 258/283
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 259/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-33
bit
TS01 234567 01 234567 01 234567 01 234567
23 1C24 2C24 3C24 4C24
24 1C25 2C25 3C25 4C25
25 1C26 2C26 3C26 4C2626 1C27 2C27 3C27 4C2727 1C28 2C28 3C28 4C28
28 1C29 2C29 3C29 4C29
29 1C30 2C30 3C30 4C30
30 1C31 2C31 3C31 4C31
31 1C32 2C32 3C32 4C32
HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3
Table B-20 HW timeslot distribution on the BS interface in 4-port 16K networking mode (2)
bit
TS
01 234567 01 234567 01 234567 01 234567
0 5C1 6C1 7C11 5C2 6C2 7C2
2 5C3 6C3 7C3
3 5C4 6C4 7C4
4 5C5 6C5 7C5
5 5C6 6C6 7C6
6 5C7 6C7 7C7
7 5C8 6C8 7C8
8 5C9 6C9 7C9 8C9
9 5C10 6C10 7C10 8C10
10 5C11 6C11 7C11 8C11
11 5C12 6C12 7C12 8C12
12 5C13 6C13 7C13 8C1313 5C14 6C14 7C14 8C1414 5C15 6C15 7C15 8C15
15 5C16 6C16 7C16 8C16
16 5C17 6C17 7C17 8C17
17 5C18 6C18 7C18 8C18
18 5C19 6C19 7C19 8C19
19 5C20 6C20 7C20 8C20
20 5C21 6C21 7C21 8C2121 5C22 6C22 7C22 8C22
22 5C23 6C23 7C23 8C23
23 5C24 6C24 7C24 8C24
24 5C25 6C25 7C25 8C25
25 5C26 6C26 7C26 8C26
26 5C27 6C27 7C27 8C2727 5C28 6C28 7C28 8C28
28 5C29 6C29 7C29 8C29
29 5C30 6C30 7C30 8C30
30 5C31 6C31 7C31 8C31
31 5C32 6C32 7C32 8C32
HW4 HW5 HW6 HW7
In the 6-E1 port 16K networking mode, E1 (0) and E1 (1) correspond to HW0~HW3,
and timeslots 3, 6 and 31 of each E1 come from the combined timeslot of HW4. E1(2)
and E1(3) correspond to HW4~HW7, and the timeslot allocation principle is the same
as that on E1(0) and E1(1), and will no longer be described below.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 260/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-34
The mapping relation from HW to the timeslot of E1 in 16K networking mode is similar
to that in the original 64K star networking mode in some aspects.
The timeslots of HW0~HW2 are respectively switched to TS1 & TS2, TS4 & TS5, TS7
& TS8, TS10 & TS11, TS13 & TS14, and TS16 & TS17 of E1(0) and E1(1). This is
completely the same as that in the original star networking mode.
Timeslot combination of HW3: The latter 24 16K timeslots are combined into 6 64K
timeslots, which can be understood as the RSL and OML timeslots in the original star
networking mode. Actually the 24 16K timeslots can be used for TCH. The former two
combined timeslots are switched to TS3 and TS6 of E1(0); the third and fourth
combined ones are switched to TS3 and TS6 of E1(1); the last two combined ones
are switched to TS31 of E1(0) and E1(1).
Table B-21 illustrates the distribution of the timeslots on the 4 E1 ports of the Abisinterface.
Table B-21 Timeslot distribution on the Abis interface in 4-E1 port * 16K signaling link networking mode
E1(2) E1(3)
0
1 5C1 5C2 5C3 5C4 6C17 6C18 6C19 6C20
2 5C5 5C6 5C7 5C8 6C21 6C22 6C23 6C243 8C9 8C10 8C11 8C12 8C17 8C18 8C19 8C20
4 5C9 5C10 5C11 5C12 6C25 6C26 6C27 6C28
5 5C13 5C14 5C15 5C16 6C29 6C30 6C31 6C32
6 8C13 8C14 8C15 8C16 8C21 8C22 8C23 8C24
E1(0) E1(1)
0
1 1C1 1C2 1C3 1C4 2C17 2C18 2C19 2C20
2 1C5 1C6 1C7 1C8 2C21 2C22 2C23 2C24
3 4C9 4C10 4C11 4C12 4C17 4C18 4C19 4C20
4 1C9 1C10 1C11 1C12 2C25 2C26 2C27 2C285 1C13 1C14 1C15 1C16 2C29 2C30 2C31 2C32
6 4C13 4C14 4C15 4C16 4C21 4C22 4C23 4C24
7 1C17 1C18 1C19 1C20 3C1 3C2 2C3 3C48 1C21 1C22 1C23 1C24 3C5 3C6 3C7 3C8
9
10 1C25 1C26 1C27 1C28 3C9 3C10 3C11 3C1211 1C29 1C30 1C31 1C32 3C13 3C14 3C15 3C16
12
13 2C1 2C2 2C3 2C4 3C17 3C18 3C19 3C20
14 2C5 2C6 2C7 2C8 3C21 3C22 3C23 3C24
15
16 2C9 2C10 2C11 2C12 3C25 3C26 3C27 3C28
17 2C13 2C14 2C15 2C16 3C29 3C30 3C31 3C32
18
19
…
28
29
3031 4C29 4C30 4C31 4C32 4C25 4C26 4C27 4C28
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 261/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-35
E1(2) E1(3)
7 5C17 5C18 5C19 5C20 7C1 7C2 7C3 7C4
8 5C21 5C22 5C23 5C24 7C5 7C6 7C7 7C8
9
10 5C25 5C26 5C27 5C28 7C9 7C10 7C11 7C1211 5C29 5C30 5C31 5C32 7C13 7C14 7C15 7C16
12
13 6C1 6C2 6C3 6C4 7C17 7C18 7C19 7C20
14 6C5 6C6 6C7 6C8 7C21 7C22 7C23 7C24
1516 6C9 6C10 6C11 6C12 7C25 7C26 7C27 7C28
17 6C13 6C14 6C15 6C16 7C29 7C30 7C31 7C32
18
19
…
28
2930
31 8C29 8C30 8C31 8C32 8C25 8C26 8C27 8C28
V. 2E1 port * multiplex/port
2E1 port * 15:1 multiplexing /port is shortened as 15:1 chain configuration. Under this
networking mode, the capacity of each E1 port is 15 TRX. It supports chain
connection and multi-chain networking. The port0 and port2 of each BIE are valid for
service, corresponding to 8 HWs, among which, HW0~HW3 are multiplexed to port0
and HW4~HW7 are multiplexed to port2.
The rate of LAPD is 64kbit/s, shared by 4 signaling links, The TCH traffic TS at Abis
interface is not occupied by SDCCH and BCCH alone.
Note:
When the BIE supporting 15:1 configuration replaces the BIE not supporting 15:1 configuration, the data
configuration under 12:1 and 10:1 mode are different.
When BTS20 adopts 15:1 data configuration, BSMU should be used.
The configuration of idle timeslots is described as follows.
z When there is no cascading, idle TSs are allocated according to TS sequence.
For timeslot allocation is fixed, each port can only be allocated with 25 idle
timeslots at most, i.e. the TS3~TS27 of each port are idle TSs.
z When there is cascading, the timeslot allocation of the first level of sites follows
the allocation principle under the case when there is no cascading. From the
second level of sites, the idle TSs allocation after being switched must follow the
allocation principle of the first level of sites.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 262/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-36
At Abis interface, there are 108 sub-TSs from TS1 to TS27 for the service channel of
15 TRXs. There are 16 signaling links for TS28 to TS31. Among the 16 signaling links,
4 share one 64kbit/s TS.
When 2-port 64kbit/s LAPD statistics multiplexing is taken for site cascading, the
number of TRXs supported is reduced by 1 as the number of sites cascaded is
increased by 1, because the signaling timeslots of different sites cannot be
multiplexed.
TSs distribution on the Abis interface is illustrated in Table B-22.
Table B-22 2-port 15:1chain networking Abis interface timeslots distribution
bit
TS
01234567
0 Synchronization TS
1~27 TRX0~TRX14 traffic TS
28 RSL11+RSL12+ RSL13+RSL14
29 RSL7+RSL8+ RSL9+RSL10
30 RSL3+RSL4+ RSL5+RSL6
31 RSL0+RSL1+ RSL2+OML
There are altogether 224 16kbit/s traffic channel and 32 64kbit/s signaling channels in
HW pattern at BS interface. Take 7.2 traffic channels for each TRX on the average, it
can support 31 TRXs at the maximum. See Table B-23 for the HW TSs distribution at
BS interface. In this table, xCx means the TSs transmitting traffic and xFx means the
TS transmitting signaling.
Table B-23 HW TSs distribution at BS interface
bit
TS
01 234567 01 234567 01 234567 01234567
0 1C1 2C1 3C1 4F16
1 1C2 2C2 3C2 4F15
2 1C3 2C3 3C3 4F14
3 1C4 2C4 3C4 4F134 1C5 2C5 3C5 4F12
5 1C6 2C6 3C6 4F11
6 1C7 2C7 3C7 4F10
7 1C8 2C8 3C8 4F98 1C9 2C9 3C9 4F8
9 1C10 2C10 3C10 4F7
10 1C11 2C11 3C11 4F6
11 1C12 2C12 3C12 4F5
12 1C13 2C13 3C13 4F4
13 1C14 2C14 3C14 4F3
14 1C15 2C15 3C15 4F215 1C16 2C16 3C16 4F1
16 1C17 2C17 3C17 4C17
17 1C18 2C18 3C18 4C18
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 263/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-37
bit
TS
01 234567 01 234567 01 234567 01234567
18 1C19 2C19 3C19 4C19
19 1C20 2C20 3C20 4C20
20 1C21 2C21 3C21 4C2121 1C22 2C22 3C22 4C2222 1C23 2C23 3C23 4C23
23 1C24 2C24 3C24 4C24
24 1C25 2C25 3C25 4C25
25 1C26 2C26 3C26 4C26
26 1C27 2C27 3C27 4C27
27 1C28 2C28 3C28 4C28
28 1C29 2C29 3C29 4C29
29 1C30 2C30 3C30 4C30
30 1C31 2C31 3C31 4C31
31 1C32 2C32 3C32 4C32
HW0 HW0 HW0 HW3
Data configuration principle under 15:1 mode is described as follows.
z The OML of each level of sites must be allocated to the 31st
TS of the incoming
E1 in its local site (achieved by the TS switching of the superior sites). The TEI of
the OML must be configured as the minimum value among all the TEIs of the
signaling link in the same TS with rate 64kbit/s. It is recommended that the TEI
be configured as 0.
z Different from TCH, BCCH and SDCCH do not occupy traffic TS and their CICs
and TS numbers are 65535 and their sub-TS Numbers are 255.
z The sub-TS number is configured as 0, 1, 2 or 3 in the Signaling ChannelConnection Table according to actual situations.
z To configure signaling links, configure the TSs are loading sharing according to
the traffic on each link so that the RSL link of the TRX containing SDCCH can be
distributed to different TSs.
z For BTS20, in the first level of sites, all the signaling TSs must be allocated to
the last four TSs TS28-TS31 of the last level of E1. But the signaling TSs of the
subsequent level of sites can be allocated to the TS16-TS31 of its superior E1
according to actual demand. By this principle, the superior level of sites should
forward all the signaling TSs of its subsequent level of sites to the last four TSs
of the cascaded E1.
z For BTS30, the signaling TSs of the first level of sites can be allocated to
TS31~TS16 of E1 in sequence. If there is cascading, the OML of the lower level
of sites must be allocated to 31st
TS, while RSL can be allocated to any TS after
TCH TS.
z The signaling TSs of different sites (including OML and RSL) cannot be allocated
to the same TS.
z Only the TCHs of the same sites can be configured to the same 64kbit/s TS.
z For dual-chain networking, the traffic TS and signaling TS of the same TRX must
be allocated to the same port, and they cannot be allocated to two different ports.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 264/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-38
z Though many combined cabinet groups belong to the same site (they require
only one OML), the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of different cabinet groups cannot be
multiplexed, i.e., the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of different cabinet groups are taken
on as TSs of different sites.
VI. Sim 12:1 and Sim 10:1 data configuration
Data configuration of the BIE supporting 15:1 cannot directly take the 12:1 and 10:1
data configuration of the BIE not supporting 15:1.
For BTS20, if the interface board is not BSMU and the BSC uses the BIE that
supports 15:1, data configuration for simulating 12:1 and 10:1 can be taken for
equipment compatibility.
1) Data configuration for simulating 12:1
Under simulating 12:1 configuration, the link rate of LAPD is 32kbit/s. The timeslots
distribution table is illustrated in Table B-24.
Table B-24 The timeslots distribution under simulating 12:1 configuration
bit
TS01 23 45 67
0 Synchronization
1 V0.0 V0.1 V0.2 V0.3
2 V0.4 V0.5 V0.6 V0.7
3 V1.0 V1.1 V1.2 V1.3
4 V1.4 V1.5 V1.6 V1.7
5 V2.0 V2.1 V2.2 V2.36 V2.4 V2.5 V2.6 V2.7
7 V3.0 V3.1 V3.2 V3.3
8 V3.4 V3.5 V3.6 V3.7
9 V4.0 V4.1 V4.2 V4.3
10 V4.4 V4.5 V4.6 V4.7
11 V5.0 V5.1 V5.2 V5.312 V5.4 V5.5 V5.6 V5.7
13 V6.0 V6.1 V6.2 V6.3
14 V6.4 V6.5 V6.6 V6.7
15 V7.0 V7.1 V7.2 V7.3
16 V7.4 V7.5 V7.6 V7.7
17 V8.0 V8.1 V8.2 V8.3
18 V8.4 V8.5 V8.6 V8.719 V9.0 V9.1 V9.2 V9.3
20 V9.4 V9.5 V9.6 V9.7
21 V10.0 V10.1 V10.2 V10.3
22 V10.4 V10.5 V10.6 V10.7
23 V11.0 V11.1 V11.2 V11.3
24 V11.4 V11.5 V11.6 V11.7
25 RSL10+RSL11
26 RSL8+RSL9
27 RSL6+RSL7
28 RSL4+RSL5
29 RSL2+RSL3
30 RSL0+RSL1
31 OML
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 265/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-39
Idle TSs are allocated according to TS sequence. Each port can only be allocated
with 22 idle timeslots at most, i.e., the TS3~TS24 of each port are idle TSs.
Data configuration for simulating 10:1
Under simulating 10:1 configuration, the link rate of LAPD is 64kbit/s. The timeslots
distribution table is illustrated in Table B-25.
Table B-25 The timeslots distribution under simulating 10:1 configuration
bit
TS
01 23 45 67
0 Synchronization
1 V0.0 V0.1 V0.2 V0.3
2 V0.4 V0.5 V0.6 V0.7
3 V1.0 V1.1 V1.2 V1.3
4 V1.4 V1.5 V1.6 V1.7
5 V2.0 V2.1 V2.2 V2.36 V2.4 V2.5 V2.6 V2.77 V3.0 V3.1 V3.2 V3.3
8 V3.4 V3.5 V3.6 V3.7
9 V4.0 V4.1 V4.2 V4.3
10 V4.4 V4.5 V4.6 V4.7
11 V5.0 V5.1 V5.2 V5.3
12 V5.4 V5.5 V5.6 V5.713 V6.0 V6.1 V6.2 V6.3
14 V6.4 V6.5 V6.6 V6.7
15 V7.0 V7.1 V7.2 V7.3
16 V7.4 V7.5 V7.6 V7.7
17 V8.0 V8.1 V8.2 V8.3
18 V8.4 V8.5 V8.6 V8.7
19 V9.0 V9.1 V9.2 V9.320 V9.4 V9.5 V9.6 V9.7
21 RSL9
22 RSL8
23 RSL7
24 RSL6
25 RSL526 RSL4
27 RSL3
28 RSL2
29 RSL1
30 RSL0
31 OML
Idle TSs are allocated according to TS sequence. Each port can only be allocated
with 18 idle timeslots at most, i.e., the TS3~TS20 of each port are idle TSs.
B.4.5 Tree Networking
Tree networking is illustrated in Figure B-24.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 266/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-40
BSC
BTS0
BTS1
BTS2
BTS3
BTS4
Figure B-24 Tree networking
Tree connection means more than 2 lower level of sites are connected to a upper
level of site. It is an extension of chain networking.
Another form of tree connection is star cascading, i.e., star connection + chain
connection.
There are two trunk modes of BIE supporting star cascading, 6E1port * 2TRX/port
(support link) and 4E1port * 6TRX/port (support link).
B.4.6 Half Rate Networking
I. Overview
Different from star, chain and tree networking modes, half rate networking is more
actually a kind of data configuration principle. It belongs to the same concept with
6-E1 port * 2TRX/port networking (supporting link) and 4-E1 port * 6TRX/port
(supporting link) networking mentioned above. Therefore, the half rate networking is
called half rate mode hereinafter.
In the half rate mode, 34BIE must be used. This kind of BIE adopts discretionary
switching mode. Therefore, the 256 HW timeslots on the BS interface can be
allocated to the voice channels or signaling channels at discretion, provided the
number of timeslots is equal to or smaller than 256. Each voice channel needs to be
allocated with 2 HW timeslots. Similarly, among the 32 E1 timeslots on the Abis
interface, except that TS0 is used for synchronization and that TS31 must be
allocated to OML, the remaining 30 timeslots can be allocated to voice channels or
signaling channels at discretion provided that the total number of timeslots is not
more than 30. The rate of LAPD is 64kbit/s, and statistics multiplexing mode is
adopted for site cascading. Every 2 signaling links can be multiplexed to one LAPD
link (different from 15:1 data configuration mode). SDCCH and BCCH do not occupy
the timeslots on the Abis interface.
In the half rate mode, the 6 E1 ports of each group of BIEs are valid. The number of
TRXs supported by each E1 port can be configured at discretion, provided it is not
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 267/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-41
more than 13, and that the total number of TRXs configured to all the 6 E1 ports is not
more than 18. The half rate mode supports such as star, chain, tree networking
modes, etc. When site cascading is adopted, as the signaling timeslots of different
sites cannot multiplexed, once a site increases, the number of TRXs supported byeach E1 port will decrease.
II. Principle for configuration of idle timeslots
The configuration of idle timeslots is described as follows.
z When there is no cascading, idle timeslots are allocated according to timeslot
sequence. For timeslot allocation is fixed, each port can only be allocated with up
to 28 timeslots as idle timeslots. That is, timeslots 3~30 of each port can be
allocated as idle timeslots.
z When there is cascading, the timeslot allocation of the first level of sites followsthe allocation principle under the case when there is no cascading. From the
second level of sites, the allocation of the idle timeslots after being switched
must follow the allocation principle of the first level of sites.
III. Data configuration principle
z The OML of each level of sites must be allocated to the 31st
TS of the incoming
E1 in its local site (achieved by the TS switching of the superior sites). The TEI of
the OML must be configured as the minimum value among all the TEIs of the
signaling link in the same TS with rate of 64kbit/s. It is recommended that the TEI
be configured as 0.
z The multiplexing ratio of OML and that of RSL are 2:1.
z Separated from TCH, BCCH and SDCCH do not occupy voice timeslots and
their CICs and TS numbers are 65535 and their sub-TS numbers are 255.
z The sub-TS number is configured as 0 or 1 in the Signaling Channel Connection
Table according to actual situations.
z The signaling TSs (including TSs of OML and RSL) and traffic TSs (of TCH) of
different sites cannot be allocated to the same TS. In case of cabinet group
combination, though multiple combined cabinet groups belong to the same site
(only one OML required), the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of different cabinet groupscannot be multiplexed, i.e., the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of different cabinet
groups are taken on as TSs of different sites.
z For dual-chain networking, the traffic TS and signaling TS of the same TRX must
be allocated to the same port, and they cannot be allocated to two different ports.
z The 256 HW timeslots (trunk circuits) of the BS1 interface are numbered
sequentially. The TCH timeslots are allocated sequentially from 0 to 255, while
the OML and RSL timeslots are allocated sequentially from 255 to 0.
z To support dynamic adjustment to channel rate, two HW timeslots are allocated
to each TCH in the Radio Channel Configuration Table. When the TCH type is
configured as full rate, the full-rate TCH occupies one timeslot, and the other one
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 268/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-42
is idle in normal cases. When the channel rate is adjusted, i.e. one full-rate TCH
is adjusted into two half-rate TCHs, each of the two half-rate TCHs occupies a
timeslot. When the TCH type is set as half rate, there are actually two half-rate
TCHs, and each occupies a HW timeslot.
IV. Example
BIE is configured with data based on half rate mode. Its port 0 is connected with a
BTS configured with two TRXs. Channel 0 of TRX 0 is "Primary BCCH", and channel
1 is "SDCCH8". Other channels of TRX 0 and all the channels of TRX 1 are
configured to be "Full rate TCH". The networking topology of BTS is illustrated below:
BSC Site 0
BIEPort 0
Figure B-25 BTS networking topology in half rate mode
1) HW timeslots
Table B-26 HW timeslot in half rate mode
HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3 HW4 HW5 HW6 HW70 T0C2 32 64 96 128 160 192 224
1 33 65 97 129 161 193 225
2 T0C3 34 66 98 130 162 194 226
3 35 67 99 131 163 195 227
4 T0C4 36 68 100 132 164 196 228
5 37 69 101 133 165 197 229
6 T0C5 38 70 102 134 166 198 230
7 39 71 103 135 167 199 231
8 T0C6 40 72 104 136 168 200 232
9 41 73 105 137 169 201 233
10 T0C7 42 74 106 138 170 202 234
11 43 75 107 139 171 203 235
12 T1C0 44 76 108 140 172 204 236
13 45 77 109 141 173 205 237
14 T1C1 46 78 110 142 174 206 238
15 47 79 111 143 175 207 239
16 T1C2 48 80 112 144 176 208 24017 49 81 113 145 177 209 241
18 T1C3 50 82 114 146 178 210 242
19 51 83 115 147 179 211 243
20 T1C4 52 84 116 148 180 212 244
21 53 85 117 149 181 213 245
22 T1C5 54 86 118 150 182 214 246
23 55 87 119 151 183 215 24724 T1C6 56 88 120 152 184 216 248
25 57 89 121 153 185 217 249
26 T1C7 58 90 122 154 186 218 25027 59 91 123 155 187 219 251
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 269/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-43
HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3 HW4 HW5 HW6 HW7
28 60 92 124 156 188 220 252
29 61 93 125 157 189 221 253
30 62 94 126 158 190 222 254 RSL1
31 63 95 127 159 191 223 255 OMLRSL0
2) Abis timeslot
Table B-27 Abis timeslots in half rate mode
Bit
TS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 Synchronization TS
1 T0C2 T0C3 T0C4 T0C5
2 T0C6 T0C7 T1C0 T1C13 T1C2 T1C3 T1C4 T1C5
4 T1C6 T1C7
…
30 RSL1
31 OML0 RSL0
B.4.7 Ring Networking
I. Overview
Ring networking provides a site cascading mode different from star, chain and tree
networking modes, but it supports star, chain and tree networking, as shown in
Figure B-26.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 270/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-44
Figure B-26 Ring networking modes
In ring networking mode, the 6 E1 ports provided by each group of BIEs are all valid,
the number of TRXs supported by each E1 port should not exceed 15, and the total
number of TRXs configured to all the 6 ports should not be larger than 30. When
there is more than one site in the ring networking mode, as the signaling timeslots of
different sites cannot be multiplexed, once a site increases, the number of TRXs
supported by each E1 port will decrease.
Parallel transparent transmission is adopted when multiple BTSs are cascaded in ring
networking mode.
During the configuration of ring networking, any two of the 6 E1 ports provided by
each group of BIEs can form a ring.
In ring networking mode, sites are classified into loop site and tributary site. As for a
loop site, only port 0 can serve as the incoming port, and port 1 as the outgoing port.
As for a tributary site, port 0 must serve as the incoming port, while any of the other
ports besides port 1 can serve as the outgoing port.
As shown in Figure B-26, sites 0, 1 and 2 in a are linked into a ring, and they are all
loop sites; sites 3 and 4 are linked into a chain. Sites 0, 1 and 2 in b are linked into a
ring, and they are all loop sites; sites 3 and 4 form a dual-chain connection together
with the ring, and the three are taken on as tributary sites. The networking of c is
similar to that of b, except that the normal ring and reverse ring are connected to the
ports provided by BIEs of different groups. Sites 0, 1, 2 and 3 in d are linked into a
ring, in which sites 0, 1 and 2 are loop sites, and site 3 is a tributary site.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 271/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-45
The configuration of idle timeslots is not supported in the full-rate ring networking
mode for the moment.
Ring networking includes full-rate ring networking and half-rate networking. Their
differences are listed below:
z The multiplexing ratio of RSL signaling in full-rate ring networking mode is 4:1,
while that in half-rate ring networking mode is 2:1.
z Some HW slots should be reserved in half-rate ring networking mode.
II. Brief introduction to 34BIE
Caution:
34BIE must be used in ring networking mode.
The features of 34BIE are described as follows:
z Discretionary switching of timeslots is adopted. As a result, the 256 HW timeslots
of the BS interface can be allocated to voice channels or signaling channels at
discretion, provided that the total number of timeslots is not more than 256.
z Similarly, among the 32 E1 timeslots of the Abis interface, except that timeslot 0
is used for synchronization, and that timeslot 31 must be allocated to the OML,
the other 30 timeslots can be allocated to voice channels or signaling channels
at discretion, provided that the total number of timeslots is not more than 30.
z The rate of LAPD is 64kbit/s, and statistics multiplexing mode is adopted. Every
4 signaling links can be multiplexed to one LAPD link. Please note that only
RSLs can be multiplexed to each other, and that RSL cannot be multiplexed to
OML.
z SDCCH and BCCH do not occupy timeslots of the Abis interface.
III. Full rate ring networking
Principle for data configuration in full-rate ring networking mode:
z Normal ring OML and reverse ring OML should be configured to each site on the
ring (including tributary site). The normal ring OML is allocated to TS31 of the
normal ring E1 port (achieved by TS switching of the superior sites). The reverse
ring OML is allocated to TS31 of the reverse ring E1 port (when two BIE ports
are linked into a ring, the port connected with port 0 of the site is regarded as the
normal ring port, and the other port as the reverse ring port).The TEI of the
normal ring OML and that of the reverse ring OML must be configured as the
minimum values among all the TEIs of the signaling link in the same TS with rate
of 64kbit/s. It is recommended that the TEIs be configured as 0
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 272/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-46
z OML and RSL cannot be multiplexed to each other. The multiplexing ratio of
RSLs is 2:1.
z When multiple sites are linked into a ring, parallel transparent transmission mode
is adopted for the timeslots of the Abis interface.z All TCHs and RSLs should be configured with reverse ring Abis interface data.
z Separated from TCH, BCCH and SDCCH do not occupy voice timeslots and
their CICs and TS numbers are 65535 and their sub-TS numbers 255.
z The sub-TS number is configured as 0, 1, 2 or 3 in the Signaling Channel
Connection Table according to actual situations.
z The signaling TSs (including TSs of OML and RSL) and traffic TSs (including TS
of TCH) of different sites cannot be allocated to the same TS. In case of cabinet
group combination, though multiple combined cabinet groups belong to the same
site (only one OML required), the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of different cabinet
groups cannot be multiplexed, i.e., the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of different
cabinet groups are taken on as TSs of different sites.
z For dual-chain networking, the traffic TS and signaling TS of the same TRX must
be allocated to the same port, and they cannot be allocated to two different ports.
z The 256 HW timeslots (trunk circuits) of the BS1 interface are numbered
sequentially. The TCH timeslots are allocated sequentially from 0 to 255, while
the OML and RSL timeslots are allocated sequentially from 255 to 0.
IV. Half rate ring networking
Principle for data configuration in half-rate ring networking mode:
z Normal ring OML and reverse ring OML should be configured to each site on the
ring (including tributary site). The normal ring OML is allocated to TS31 of the
normal ring E1 port (achieved by TS switching of the superior sites). The reverse
ring OML is allocated to TS31 of the reverse ring E1 port (when two BIE ports
are linked into a ring, the port connected with port 0 of the site is regarded as the
normal ring port, and the other port as the reverse ring port).The TEI of the
normal ring OML and that of the reverse ring OML must be configured as the
minimum values among all the TEIs of the signaling link in the same TS with rate
of 64kbit/s. It is recommended that the TEIs be configured as 0.
z OML and RSL cannot be multiplexed to each other. The multiplexing ratio of
RSLs is 2:1.
z When multiple sites are linked into a ring, parallel transparent transmission mode
is adopted for the timeslots of the Abis interface.
z All TCHs and RSLs should be configured with reverse ring Abis interface data.
z Separated from TCH, BCCH and SDCCH do no occupy voice timeslots. Their
CICs and TS numbers are 65535, and their sub-TS numbers are 255.
z The sub-TS number is configured as 0 or 1 in the Signaling Channel Connection
Table according to actual situations.
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 273/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-47
z The signaling TSs (including TSs of OML and RSL) and traffic TSs (including TS
of TCH) of different sites cannot be allocated to the same TS. In case of cabinet
group combination, though multiple combined cabinet groups belong to the same
site (only one OML required), the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of different cabinetgroups cannot be multiplexed, i.e., the RSL TSs and TCH TSs of different
cabinet groups are taken on as TSs of different sites.
z For dual-chain networking, the traffic TS and signaling TS of the same TRX must
be allocated to the same port, and they cannot be allocated to two different ports.
z The 256 HW timeslots (trunk circuits) of the BS1 interface are numbered
sequentially. The TCH timeslots are allocated sequentially from 0 to 255, while
the OML and RSL timeslots are allocated sequentially from 255 to 0
z To support dynamic adjustment to channel rate, two HW timeslots are allocated
to each TCH in the Radio Channel Configuration Table. When the TCH type is
configured as full rate, the full-rate TCH occupies one timeslot, and the other one
is idle in normal cases. When the channel rate is adjusted, i.e. one full-rate TCH
is adjusted into two half-rate TCHs, each of the half-rate TCHs occupies a
timeslot. When the TCH type is set as half rate, there are actually two half-rate
TCHs, and each occupies a HW timeslot.
V. Examples
Ports 0 and 1 of the BIE are linked into a full-rate ring networking mode, in which five
sites (Site0~Site4) are connected and each site is configured with two TRXs. Channel
0 of TRX0 is "Primary BCCH", and channel 1 is "SDCCH8". The other channels of TRX0 together with all the channels of TRX1 are configured as "Full rate TCH".
"Site3" is a tributary site, and the other four sites are loop sites. Port 0 of the BIE
serves as the normal ring port, and port 1 of the BIE as the reverse ring port. Port2 is
the port of the superior site of "Site3". The networking topology of sites is shown as
follows:
Site 0BSC
BIE Port 0
Site 1 Site 3
Site 4 Site 2
Figure B-27 Networking topology of sites in full-rate ring networking mode
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 274/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-48
1) HW timeslots
Table B-28 HW timeslots in full-rate ring networking mode
HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3 HW4 HW5 HW6 HW7
0 S0T0C2 32 S2T0C6 64 S4T1C2 96 128 160 192 224
1 S0T0C3 33 S2T0C7 65 S4T1C3 97 129 161 193 225
2 S0T0C4 34 S2T1C0 66 S4T1C4 98 130 162 194 226
3 S0T0C5 35 S2T1C1 67 S4T1C5 99 131 163 195 227
4 S0T0C6 36 S2T1C2 68 S4T1C6 100 132 164 196 228
5 S0T0C7 37 S2T1C3 69 S4T1C7 101 133 165 197 229
6 S0T1C0 38 S2T1C4 70 102 134 166 198 230
7 S0T1C1 39 S2T1C5 71 103 135 167 199 231
8 S0T1C2 40 S2T1C6 72 104 136 168 200 232
9 S0T1C3 41 S2T1C7 73 105 137 169 201 233
10 S0T1C4 42 S3T0C2 74 106 138 170 202 234
11 S0T1C5 43 S3T0C3 75 107 139 171 203 235
12 S0T1C6 44 S3T0C4 76 108 140 172 204 236
13 S0T1C7 45 S3T0C5 77 109 141 173 205 237
14 S1T0C2 46 S3T0C6 78 110 142 174 206 238
15 S1T0C3 47 S3T0C7 79 111 143 175 207 239
16 S1T0C4 48 S3T1C0 80 112 144 176 208 240
17 S1T0C5 49 S3T1C1 81 113 145 177 209 241 S4RSL0/RSL1
18 S1T0C6 50 S3T1C2 82 114 146 178 210 242 S3RSL0/RSL1
19 S1T0C7 51 S3T1C3 83 115 147 179 211 243 S2RSL0/RSL1
20 S1T1C0 52 S3T1C4 84 116 148 180 212 244 S1RSL0/RSL1
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 275/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-49
HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3 HW4 HW5 HW6 HW7
21 S1T1C1 53 S3T1C5 85 117 149 181 213 245 S0RSL0/RSL1
22 S1T1C2 54 S3T1C6 86 118 150 182 214 246 OML4(reverse)
23 S1T1C3 55 S3T1C7 87 119 151 183 215 247 OML4(normal)
24 S1T1C4 56 S4T0C2 88 120 152 184 216 248 OML3(reverse)
25 S1T1C5 57 S4T0C3 89 121 153 185 217 249 OML3(normal)
26 S1T1C6 58 S4T0C4 90 122 154 186 218 250 OML2(reverse)
27 S1T1C7 59 S4T0C5 91 123 155 187 219 251 OML2(normal)
28 S2T0C2 60 S4T0C6 92 124 156 188 220 252 OML1(reverse)
29 S2T0C3 61 S4T0C7 93 125 157 189 221 253 OML1(normal)
30 S2T0C4 62 S4T1C0 94 126 158 190 222 254 OML0(reverse)
31 S2T0C5 63 S4T1C1 95 127 159 191 223 255 OML0(normal)
2) Abis timeslots
Parallel transparent transmission is adopted for the TCH of the normal ring and
reverse ring and RSL signaling channel on the Abis interface. Therefore, the timeslot
sequencing of the TCH and that of the RSL signaling channel in the normal ring and
reverse ring are the same on the Abis interface.
Table B-29 illustrates the distribution of the normal ring timeslots on the Abis
interface.
Table B-29 Distribution of the normal ring timeslots on the Abis interface
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 Synchronization TS
1 S0T0C2 S0T0C3 S0T0C4 S0T0C5
2 S0T0C6 S0T0C7 S0T1C0 S0T1C1
3 S0T1C2 S0T1C3 S0T1C4 S0T1C5
4 S0T1C6 S0T1C7
5 S1T0C2 S1T0C3 S1T0C4 S1T0C5
6 S1T0C6 S1T0C7 S1T1C0 S1T1C1
7 S1T1C2 S1T1C3 S1T1C4 S1T1C5
8 S1T1C6 S1T1C7
9 S2T0C2 S2T0C3 S2T0C4 S2T0C5
10 S2T0C6 S2T0C7 S2T1C0 S2T1C1
11 S2T1C2 S2T1C3 S2T1C4 S2T1C5
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 276/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-50
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
12 S2T1C6 S2T1C7
13 S3T0C2 S3T0C3 S3T0C4 S3T0C5
14 S3T0C6 S3T0C7 S3T1C0 S3T1C1
15 S3T1C2 S3T1C3 S3T1C4 S3T1C516 S3T1C6 S3T1C7
17 S4T0C2 S4T0C3 S4T0C4 S4T0C5
18 S4T0C6 S4T0C7 S4T1C0 S4T1C1
19 S4T1C2 S4T1C3 S4T1C4 S4T1C5
20 S4T1C6 S4T1C7
…
22 S4RSL0 S4RSL1
23 S3RSL0 S3RSL1
24 S2RSL0 S2RSL1
25 S1RSL0 S1RSL1
26 S0RSL0 S0RSL1
27 OML4
28 OML329 OML2
30 OML1
31 OML0
Since the timeslot sequencing of the TCH and that of the RSL signaling channel in
the normal ring and reverse ring are the same on the Abis interface. Only the
sequencing of OML timeslots is listed, as shown in Table B-30.
Table B-30 Timeslots distribution on the Abis interface in the reverse ring
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
…
27 OML3
28 OML0
29 OML1
30 OML2
31 OML4
3) Transparent transmission timeslots of the loop site in the normal ring
Table B-31 Distribution of transparent transmission timeslots on the Abis interface in the normal ring (a)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 Synchronization TS Synchronization TS
1 S0T0C2 S0T0C3 S0T0C4 S0T0C5
2 S0T0C6 S0T0C7 S0T1C0 S0T1C1
3 S0T1C2 S0T1C3 S0T1C4 S0T1C5
4 S0T1C6 S0T1C7
5 S1T0C2 S1T0C3 S1T0C4 S1T0C5 S1T0C2 S1T0C3 S1T0C4 S1T0C5
6 S1T0C6 S1T0C7 S1T1C0 S1T1C1 S1T0C6 S1T0C7 S1T1C0 S1T1C1
7 S1T1C2 S1T1C3 S1T1C4 S1T1C5 S1T1C2 S1T1C3 S1T1C4 S1T1C5
8 S1T1C6 S1T1C7 S1T1C6 S1T1C7
9 S2T0C2 S2T0C3 S2T0C4 S2T0C5 S2T0C2 S2T0C3 S2T0C4 S2T0C5
10 S2T0C6 S2T0C7 S2T1C0 S2T1C1 S2T0C6 S2T0C7 S2T1C0 S2T1C1
11 S2T1C2 S2T1C3 S2T1C4 S2T1C5 S2T1C2 S2T1C3 S2T1C4 S2T1C5
12 S2T1C6 S2T1C7 S2T1C6 S2T1C7
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 277/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-51
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
13 S3T0C2 S3T0C3 S3T0C4 S3T0C5 S3T0C2 S3T0C3 S3T0C4 S3T0C5
14 S3T0C6 S3T0C7 S3T1C0 S3T1C1 S3T0C6 S3T0C7 S3T1C0 S3T1C1
15 S3T1C2 S3T1C3 S3T1C4 S3T1C5 S3T1C2 S3T1C3 S3T1C4 S3T1C5
16 S3T1C6 S3T1C7 S3T1C6 S3T1C717 S4T0C2 S4T0C3 S4T0C4 S4T0C5 S4T0C2 S4T0C3 S4T0C4 S4T0C5
18 S4T0C6 S4T0C7 S4T1C0 S4T1C1 S4T0C6 S4T0C7 S4T1C0 S4T1C1
19 S4T1C2 S4T1C3 S4T1C4 S4T1C5 S4T1C2 S4T1C3 S4T1C4 S4T1C5
20 S4T1C6 S4T1C7 S4T1C6 S4T1C7
21
22 S4RSL0 S4RSL1 S4RSL0 S4RSL1
23 S3RSL0 S3RSL1 S3RSL0 S3RSL1
24 S2RSL0 S2RSL1 S2RSL0 S2RSL1
25 S1RSL0 S1RSL1 S1RSL0 S1RSL1
26 S0RSL0 S0RSL1
27 OML4 OML4
28 OML3 OML3
29 OML2 OML230 OML1
31 OML0 OML1
BTS0 BTS1
Table B-32 Distribution of transparent transmission timeslots on the Abis interface in the normal ring (b)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 Synchronization TS Synchronization TS1
2
3
4
5
6
78
9 S2T0C2 S2T0C3 S2T0C4 S2T0C5
10 S2T0C6 S2T0C7 S2T1C0 S2T1C1
11 S2T1C2 S2T1C3 S2T1C4 S2T1C5
12 S2T1C6 S2T1C7
1314
15
16
17 S4T0C2 S4T0C3 S4T0C4 S4T0C5 S4T0C2 S4T0C3 S4T0C4 S4T0C518 S4T0C6 S4T0C7 S4T1C0 S4T1C1 S4T0C6 S4T0C7 S4T1C0 S4T1C1
19 S4T1C2 S4T1C3 S4T1C4 S4T1C5 S4T1C2 S4T1C3 S4T1C4 S4T1C5
20 S4T1C6 S4T1C7 S4T1C6 S4T1C7
21
22 S4RSL0 S4RSL1 S4RSL0 S4RSL1
23
24 S2RSL0 S2RSL1
25
2627 OML4
28
29
30
31 OML2 OML4
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 278/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-52
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
BTS2 BTS3
4) Transparent transmission timeslots of the loop site in the reverse ring
Table B-33 Distribution of transparent transmission timeslots on the Abis interface in the reverse ring (a)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 Synchronization TS Synchronization TS
1 S0T0C2 S0T0C3 S0T0C4 S0T0C5 S0T0C2 S0T0C3 S0T0C4 S0T0C5
2 S0T0C6 S0T0C7 S0T1C0 S0T1C1 S0T0C6 S0T0C7 S0T1C0 S0T1C1
3 S0T1C2 S0T1C3 S0T1C4 S0T1C5 S0T1C2 S0T1C3 S0T1C4 S0T1C5
4 S0T1C6 S0T1C7 S0T1C6 S0T1C7
5 S1T0C2 S1T0C3 S1T0C4 S1T0C5 S1T0C2 S1T0C3 S1T0C4 S1T0C5
6 S1T0C6 S1T0C7 S1T1C0 S1T1C1 S1T0C6 S1T0C7 S1T1C0 S1T1C1
7 S1T1C2 S1T1C3 S1T1C4 S1T1C5 S1T1C2 S1T1C3 S1T1C4 S1T1C5
8 S1T1C6 S1T1C7 S1T1C6 S1T1C79 S2T0C2 S2T0C3 S2T0C4 S2T0C5 S2T0C2 S2T0C3 S2T0C4 S2T0C5
10 S2T0C6 S2T0C7 S2T1C0 S2T1C1 S2T0C6 S2T0C7 S2T1C0 S2T1C1
11 S2T1C2 S2T1C3 S2T1C4 S2T1C5 S2T1C2 S2T1C3 S2T1C4 S2T1C5
12 S2T1C6 S2T1C7 S2T1C6 S2T1C7
13 S3T0C2 S3T0C3 S3T0C4 S3T0C5 S3T0C2 S3T0C3 S3T0C4 S3T0C5
14 S3T0C6 S3T0C7 S3T1C0 S3T1C1 S3T0C6 S3T0C7 S3T1C0 S3T1C1
15 S3T1C2 S3T1C3 S3T1C4 S3T1C5 S3T1C2 S3T1C3 S3T1C4 S3T1C516 S3T1C6 S3T1C7 S3T1C6 S3T1C7
17 S4T0C2 S4T0C3 S4T0C4 S4T0C5
18 S4T0C6 S4T0C7 S4T1C0 S4T1C1
19 S4T1C2 S4T1C3 S4T1C4 S4T1C5
20 S4T1C6 S4T1C7
21
22 S4RSL0 S4RSL1
23 S3RSL0 S3RSL1 S3RSL0 S3RSL1
24 S2RSL0 S2RSL1 S2RSL0 S2RSL1
25 S1RSL0 S1RSL1 S1RSL0 S1RSL1
26 S0RSL0 S0RSL1 S0RSL0 S0RSL1
27 OML3 OML3
28 OML0 OML0
29 OML1 OML1
30 OML2
31 OML4 OML2
BTS0 BTS1
Table B-34 Distribution of transparent transmission timeslots on the Abis interface in the reverse ring (b)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 Synchronization TS Synchronization TS1 S0T0C2 S0T0C3 S0T0C4 S0T0C5 S0T0C2 S0T0C3 S0T0C4 S0T0C5
2 S0T0C6 S0T0C7 S0T1C0 S0T1C1 S0T0C6 S0T0C7 S0T1C0 S0T1C1
3 S0T1C2 S0T1C3 S0T1C4 S0T1C5 S0T1C2 S0T1C3 S0T1C4 S0T1C5
4 S0T1C6 S0T1C7 S0T1C6 S0T1C7
5 S1T0C2 S1T0C3 S1T0C4 S1T0C5
6 S1T0C6 S1T0C7 S1T1C0 S1T1C17 S1T1C2 S1T1C3 S1T1C4 S1T1C5
8 S1T1C6 S1T1C7
9
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 279/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual Appendix B Fundamental Knowledge
B-53
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
10
11
12
13 S3T0C2 S3T0C3 S3T0C4 S3T0C514 S3T0C6 S3T0C7 S3T1C0 S3T1C1
15 S3T1C2 S3T1C3 S3T1C4 S3T1C5
16 S3T1C6 S3T1C7
17
1819
20
21
22
23 S3RSL0 S3RSL1
2425 S1RSL0 S1RSL1
26 S0RSL0 S0RSL1 S0RSL0 S0RSL1
27 OML3
28 OML0
29
30
31 OML1 OML0BTS2 BTS3
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 280/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Appendix CCorrespondence Relation between Data Table and DBF Files
C-1
Appendix C Correspondence Relation between
Data Table and DBF Files
Configuration
Frame Description Table framedes
Slot Description Table shelfdes
Master Node Description Table nodedesc
HW Description Table hwgrpdes
Module Description Table auxiliar
Clock Description Table clockdes
Clock Configuration Table clkconfi
GCKS Clock Configuration Table (SM) clkcfg
Software Parameter
Public Parameter Table pubparam
Module Parameter Table modparam
Common Maximum Tuple Table pmaxtup
Module Maximum Tuple Table mmaxtup
Software Parameter Table softpara
Timer Table timer
BTS Software Parameter Table btspara
Message Filter Table msgfil
AM Configuration
AM Frame Description Table amframe
AM Board Description Table amboard
AM Module Description Table ammodule
AM Alarm Environment Variable Table amenvic
AM Adjacent Module OPT Table amadj
Signaling Link Table sigroute
E3M CLK Source Output Selection Table e16clk
E3M E1 Configuration Table e16bde1
AM GCKS Configuration Table amckscfg
AM Alarm Screening Table amwrnmsk
Local office
Local Office Information Table locexinf
BSC Cell Table bsccell
Frequency Hopping Table hopdata
TRX Configuration Table bsctrx
Radio Channel Configuration Table Abiscir
LAPD Semi-perm. Connection Table lapdsemi
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 281/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Appendix CCorrespondence Relation between Data Table and DBF Files
C-2
Local office
LAPD Signaling Connection Table lapdsglk
BSC BIE Description Table bscbiesd
BSC BIE Active/Stby. Group Description Table biegrpc
Site BIE Trunk Mode Description Table biestdp
Site BIE Configuration Table strelaym
Signaling Channel Link Table sgcanlt
MSM and FTC Mapping Table smiftc
Service Channel Connection Table transglt
GMEM Configuration Table memip
Board Software Loading Table Cardlod
BSC BIE Semi-permanent Connection Table Bscbiesp
SiteSite Description Table siteinfo
Carrier Configuration Table rccfg
Site Frame Description Table shelfinf
Site Slot Description Table btsslot
Site Software Configuration Table softidx
Environment Alarm Configuration Table btsenvi
Antenna and Feeder Configuration Table reactive
Cell
System Information Table symgdatl
Cell Configuration Table cellcfg
Cell Allocation Table cealotl
BA1 (BCCH) Table ba1
BA2 (SACCH) Table ba2
Cell Attribute Table cellattr
Cell Alarm Threshold Table cellalm
Cell Call Control Table callctrl
Cell Call Control Parameter Table celcalmp
Cell Module Information Table cgitbl
Handover
Handover Control Table swctrl
Cell Description Table celldes
External Cell Description Table extcell
Adjacent Cell Relation Table nebcell
Filter Table filterd
Penalty Table penalty
Emergency Handover Table urgedat
Load Handover Table clsdata
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 282/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Appendix CCorrespondence Relation between Data Table and DBF Files
C-3
Handover
Normal Handover Table nordata
Fast-Moving Handover Table movedata
Intra-cell Continuous HO Control Table intraho
GSM0508 Handover Table cellho2
Concentric Cell Handover Table circswit
Power
Power Control Selection Table pwrctls
Ordinary Cell Power Control Table cellpwrc
BTS Power Control Table btspwrc
MS Power Control Table mspwrc
HWII Power Control Table hw2pwrct
Channel
Radio Channel Management Control Table freechpr
HW II Channel Allocation Table chanall
Trunk
Office Direction Table office
Trunk Group Table tkgrp
Trunk SS7 Table no7info
Trunk Circuit Table tkcircui
Signaling Link Table sigroute
Pb Interface Trunk Circuit Table pbinterf
Signaling
CIC Module Table cicmdl
MTP DEP Table mtpdsp
MTP Route Table mtproute
MTP Linkset Table mtplinks
MTP Link Table mtplinkSCCP DSP Table sccpdpc
SCCP SSN Table sccpssn
PCIC Module Table pcicmodu
Alarm
BSC Alarm Parameter
BTS Alarm Information Configuration Table warncfg
BTS Alarm Environment Variable Table envicfg
BTS Alarm Parameter
Alarm Information Parameter Table warncfgb
7/29/2019 Data Configuration Manual-Dynamic Configuration
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/data-configuration-manual-dynamic-configuration 283/283
Dynamic ConfigurationM900/M1800 BSC Data Configuration Manual
Appendix CCorrespondence Relation between Data Table and DBF Files
Alarm